Read TargetProUS47_UG.book text version

MapInfo TargetProTM

Version 4.7 User Guide

Information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of the vendor or its representatives. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, without the written permission of MapInfo Corporation, One Global View, Troy, New York 12180-8399. © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved. MapInfo, MapInfo Professional, the MapInfo logo and TargetPro are trademarks of MapInfo Corporation and/or its affiliates. MapInfo Corporate Headquarters: Voice: (518) 285-6000 Fax: (518) 285-6070 Sales Info Hotline: (800) 327-8627 Government Sales Hotline: (800) 619-2333 Technical Support Hotline: (518) 285-7283 Technical Support Fax: (518) 285-6080 Contact information for North American offices is located at: http://www.mapinfo.com/company/contact_corporate.cfm. Contact information for European and Middle East offices is located at: http://www.mapinfo.com/company/contact_europe.cfm. Contact information for Asia Pacific offices is located at: http://www.mapinfo.com/company/contact_asiapacific.cfm. Adobe Acrobat ® is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States. Xceed by Xceed Software Inc. (c) 1995-1999. All Rights Reserved. TrueDBGrid Library by APEX Software Corporation (c) 1991, 1998. All Rights Reserved. ACtive Directory, Active X, BackOffice, CodeView, Developer Studio, FoxPro, JScript, Microsoft, Microsoft Press, Microsoft SQL Server, MSDN, MS-DOS, Outlook, PivotChart, PivotTable, PowerPoint, Visual Basic, Visual C++, Visual Studio, Win32, Windows 2000, Windows, Windows NT, and Windows XP are either registered trademarkes or trade marks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Portions (c) Copyright 2005 Microsoft Corporation. All rights Reserved. The DMA Boundaries and DMA data contained herein are owned solely and exclusively by, and are used herein pursuant to a license from, Nielsen Media Research Inc. Any use and/or reproduction of these materials without the express written consent of Nielsen Media Research Inc. is strictly prohibited. The DMA boundaries and DMA data are effective for the period 2003-2005. libtiff © 1988-1995 Sam Leffler, copyright © Silicon Graphics, Inc. libgeotiff © 1995 Niles D. Ritter. Portions © 1999 3D Graphics, Inc. All Rights Reserved. HIL - Halo Image Library © 1993, Media Cybernetics Inc. Halo Imaging Library is a trademark of Media Cybernetics, Inc. Portions thereof LEAD Technologies, Inc. © 1991-2003. All Rights Reserved. Portions © 1993-2005 Ken Martin, Will Schroeder, Bill Lorensen. All Rights Reserved. ECW by ER Mapper © 1993-2005 VM Grid by Northwood Technologies, Inc., a Marconi Company © 1995-2005. Portions © 2003 Earth Resource Mapping, Ltd. All Rights Reserved. MrSID, MrSID Decompressor and the MrSID logo are trademarks of LizardTech, Inc. used under license. Portions of this computer program are copyright © 19951998 LizardTech and/or the university of California or are protected by US patent nos. 5,710,835 or 5,467,110 and are used under license. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected under US and international patent & copyright treaties and foreign patent applications are pending. Unauthorized use or duplication prohibited. Contains FME ® Objects; © 2005 Safe Software, Inc. Crystal Reports ® is proprietary trademark of Crystal Decisions. All Rights Reserved. Products named herein may be trademarks of their respective manufacturers and are hereby recognized. Trademarked names are used editorially, to the benefit of the trademark owner, with no intent to infringe on the trademark. Portions © Tele Atlas, Inc (GDT, Inc.) May 2005

TargetPro User Guide

Table of Contents

Table of Contents

Chapter 1: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

TargetPro Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Key Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MapInfo Professional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Crystal Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Microsoft SQL Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Custom Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Guide Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 5 6 6

Chapter 2: Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Starting TargetPro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Logging In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Opening a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Working with Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Studying the Project Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Learning the Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 TargetPro Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 TargetPro Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Key Map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Layer Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Map Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Setting Project Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Enabling Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Displaying Login Dialogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Displaying Warning Dialogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Displaying MapInfo Professional Toolbars and Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Creating Mappable Files from Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Showing Key Map and Layer Manager Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Setting a Tab File Import Threshold. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Changing the Default Key Map Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Changing the Default Zoom Layering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Additional Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Using the Workspace Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Chapter 3: Map Concepts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Zooming and Panning the Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Zooming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Panning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Map Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About the Layer Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting the Active Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

22 22 22 23 24 25

i

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Table of Contents

Adding a Layer to the Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing a Layer from the Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing Layer Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Browsing a Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Re-ordering Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting Geographies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Refreshing the Layer Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customizing Map Layer Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lines, Nodes, and Centroids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Zoom Layering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Thematic Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing Thematic Map Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Label Options for a Map Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Labeling Using a Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Labeling with Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Layer Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Label Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

25 25 25 25 25 26 26 26 27 27 28 29 31 33 34 34 34 35 36

Chapter 4: Working with Geographies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Finding a Geography on the Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Point with Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Buffers Around a Set of Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Point with Rings from an Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Point with Rings from a Street Intersection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Point with Rings Using Longitude/Latitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Polygon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drive Time and Drive Distance Trade Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Custom Geographies with MapInfo Professional. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting Geographies on the Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting Non-Contiguous Geographies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting Contiguous Geographies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting Geographies From a Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting Geographies by Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Examples of Selecting Geographies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting Geographies Within or Overlapped by a Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Geography Selections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving the Current Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying Previous Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting Geographies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Trade Areas Using the Capture Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Trade Areas Using a Customer Dataset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Trade Areas Using a Market Demographic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 49 50 51 51 51 52 54 54 55 55 55 55 56 56 60

Chapter 5: Importing and Registering Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

ii

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Table of Contents

Accessing the Data Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Manager Menu and Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing to Import Your Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing Data from a TAB File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing Data from Other Data Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linking to a Data Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Registering Additional Attribute Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Registering Areas Built from Registered Boundaries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Registering Boundary Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Registering Geocoded Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Registering Non Geocoded Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

64 65 66 66 68 69 72 75 79 81 85 91

Chapter 6: Working with Your Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Exporting Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Deleting a Linked Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Performing Batch Geocoding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Modifying Data Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Creating Custom Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Creating an Expression Variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Creating a True Median Variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Creating a Radius Based Variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Creating a Geography Based Constant Variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Creating a Geography Based Parent Variable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Working with Index Based Templates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Creating an Index Based Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Editing an Index Based Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Deleting an Index Based Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Changing Access to a Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Saving a Template with a New Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Chapter 7: Managing Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Understanding Clusters and Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PSYTE Clusters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cluster System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Filter or Weighted Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Geographic Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Product Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Product Profile from Scratch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Converting a Geographic Profile to a Product Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Customer Record Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Summarized Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Organizing Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Profile Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing Folder Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

112 112 112 113 113 114 118 120 120 122 122 124 126 126 127

iii

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Table of Contents

Adding Profiles to a Folder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Renaming Custom Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting a Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Merging Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Getting Profile Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing Target Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessing the Target Group Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a New Group Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Groups to a Group Set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Renaming a Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting a Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing Target Group Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Clusters to a Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing Clusters from a Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying Cluster Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

127 127 127 128 128 128 129 129 130 130 130 131 131 131 132

Chapter 8: Running Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Quick View Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copying the Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Standard Demographic Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Profile Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ranking Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Running a Standard Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting the Reporting Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting Geographies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting a Report to Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Report Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing Report Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting an Output Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Running the Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Custom Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Redesigning the Report Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing Custom Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Folders for Custom Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing Custom Report Access Rights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting a Custom Report or Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving Custom Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Upgrading Custom Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Running Multiple Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 137 137 138 139 144 144 145 146 147 148 151 151 152 153 155 155 156 157 157 157 158

Chapter 9: Running Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Choosing a Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bar Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battlegrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gains and Lift Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chart Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Running a Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

160 160 160 161 161 162

iv

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Table of Contents

Analyzing Bar Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding the Bar Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Profile Bar Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Profile Fever Line Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analyzing Battlegrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analyzing Gains and Lift Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lift Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing Cluster Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

163 163 164 165 167 175 176 177

Chapter 10: Preparing a Map for Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Adding a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customizing the Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Scalebar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Simple Scalebar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Repositioning the Scalebar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Map Scale Accuracy for Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Scale with a Limited Frame Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Scale with a Limit on Map Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Map Layout for Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Up the Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing Your Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Advanced Printing Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Output Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display and Color Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overriding the Default Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 181 182 182 183 184 184 184 185 185 185 185 186 186 186 186

Appendix A: Glossary of Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Appendix B: Reserved Keywords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

SQL Server Reserved Keywords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 ODBC Reserved Keywords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Future Keywords. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

v

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Table of Contents

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

vi

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

Introduction

1

Welcome to TargetPro® version 4.7, the marketing information system that provides you with powerful tools to perform accurate demographic analysis. It seamlessly integrates your customer data with any of MapInfo's demographic, geographic, business, and segmentation databases. TargetPro is a mapping application built around MapInfo Professional®. Powered by MapInfo Professional's robust mapping functionality, TargetPro includes many mapping features to help you display and analyze your data. TargetPro also provides you with advanced functionality and marketing information to answer your specific questions.

In this section:

! ! ! ! ! What is TargetPro and What Does it Do? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TargetPro Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About This Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 3 4 5 6

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 1: Introduction

What is TargetPro and What Does it Do?

TargetPro is the solution that enables you to link location analysis to CRM systems and demographic, geographic, and business databases. TargetPro helps make accurate and confident business decisions by giving you insight into the demographic and purchase behavior characteristics of any customer group or geographic area. With TargetPro you can profile, analyze and understand customers and markets to predict buying behavior for virtually any business or consumer product or service. Explore customer and prospect data within TargetPro 's robust, analytical reporting engine, then compare it with the most accurate consumer and business demographic data available. TargetPro is used extensively by marketers, researchers and analysts for: · · · · · Market Potential Analysis Site Selection New Product Introductions Promotional and Marketing Campaigns Merger and Acquisition Analysis

You control the data you use in your analysis by selecting specific geographic areas of interest, importing your own data, and picking the attributes and values you want to use. Analyze your census and attribute data by comparing them against variables, or segment them into clusters of similar neighborhood behavior patterns. You can view the results of your analysis in a variety of ways. Outputting to a report provides a tabular format which is especially useful when presenting results to others. Maps show the geographic context of results by displaying the values themed in color and pattern; this makes a strong visual impact when presenting your results. You can also export your results to other file formats to enable further processing using other tools outside TargetPro. Using TargetPro you can locate lucrative sites and markets, identify and reach your best prospects, and plan the most successful cross-sell and retention programs possible. This book describes how to use TargetPro for market analysis. It contains tips and information for this version of the software only. Subsequent shipments of the software may or may not contain a similar guide. This entire guide should be reviewed before commencing with market analysis.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

2

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 1: Introduction

TargetPro Features

TargetPro provides all the mapping functionality needed to interact directly with a map, such as the ability to control the map view detail, pan and zoom, apply thematic shades, digitize and edit points and trade areas, directly view data for points and areas on the map, and select geographies on which to generate reports. Select any standard area you want to study by simply pointing and clicking on a map or by accessing a text-based list of geographic areas. TargetPro is not exclusively a mapping application. It also contains a more traditional text-based user interface, allowing you to select or locate particular geographies from a folder-based selection tool. TargetPro enables you to profile your customer and prospect data, and then compare it with the most accurate consumer and business demographic data available. It can provide insight into the demographic and purchase behavior characteristics of any geographic area in the United States, helping you to make accurate and confident business decisions. With TargetPro you can profile, analyze, and understand customers and markets to predict buying behavior for virtually any business, consumer product, or service. TargetPro is used extensively by marketers, researchers and analysts for site selection, new product introductions, promotional and marketing campaigns, and merger and acquisition analysis.

Key Features

The following are some of the key features in TargetPro that provide flexibility when analyzing your data.

Accessing Your Data

· COMBINE YOUR DATA WITH OTHER DATA SETS ­ Import or link to your customer data to combine it with the demographic, marketing potential, media, and cluster data sets available to you in TargetPro. You can import the data directly into TargetPro, or link to data stored in most popular relational database platforms. CREATE CUSTOM TRADE AREAS ­ Draw rings, generate drive-time or drive-distance areas, use the free hand drawing tools, or use the Capture tool to create trade areas for your analysis. You can also import custom trade areas, such as telecommunication boundaries, from MapInfo Professional or a variety of other spatial analysis packages. CREATE CUSTOM VARIABLES ­ You can easily create a variety of new data variables in TargetPro using Data Manager functionality.

·

·

Running Reports

The following are features when running reports on the various databases provided with TargetPro. · SAVE REPORTS IN POPULAR FORMATS ­ Sharing your reports and maps is easy, because you can save and output them in a variety of formats, including Adobe Acrobat (PDF), HTML, and Crystal Reports, or as simple spreadsheets.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

3

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 1: Introduction

·

BATCH REPORTING ­ For speed and convenience, you can select and run multiple reports on multiple areas at the same time. These reports can also be sent directly to the printer in a batch. EXPORTING CAPABILITIES ­ You can output the results of your reports to Access, Excel, and CSV formats.

·

Working in an Enterprise Setting

TargetPro can be used by a single analyst on a desktop or by groups of analysts in a client server environment. When using a centralized database, you can publish your maps and reports into folders others can access. Projects can be marked as Private to restrict access if necessary.

Geocoding Addresses

Ability to geocode data from within the TargetPro user interface (for MapMarker® licensees).

Software Components

TargetPro gives you the tools to perform sophisticated demographic analysis by building on existing mapping and database technology. The software components that install with TargetPro include MapInfo Professional, Crystal Reports®, and Microsoft® SQL ServerTM. MapInfo Professional provides mapping and spatial analysis functionality, Crystal Reports is a professional reporting tool, and Microsoft SQL Server provides the database technology. TargetPro also gives you the flexibility to work with your own custom data sources, such as a customer database or data repository.

MapInfo Professional

MapInfo Professional is a comprehensive desktop mapping tool that provides the facilities for complex geographic analysis such as redistricting, linking to your remote data, dragging and dropping map objects into your applications, creating thematic maps that emphasize patterns in your data, and much more. TargetPro's demographic functionality is seamlessly integrated with MapInfo Professional, which provides advanced data analysis, mapping, and reporting facilities. TargetPro uses the standard features of MapInfo Professional for map display, as well as navigation features such as zoom, pan, layer control, and object selection. TargetPro provides additional demographic-specific functionality through a menu added to MapInfo Professional's top-level menu bar.

Crystal Reports

The TargetPro reporting facility is built using Business Objects'® Crystal Reports. Crystal Reports provides powerful reporting functionality for creating reports from tabular data. For fast and easy reporting, TargetPro installs with standard reports and in addition you are able to create custom reports for your specific needs.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

4

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 1: Introduction

Microsoft SQL Server

Microsoft SQL Server provides the database technology for TargetPro. SQL Server is a database management system. It is used for storing the data that installs with, or can be purchased for, TargetPro.TargetPro also takes advantage of Microsoft SQL Server's importing and linking capabilities.

Custom Data

You can easily integrate your own data sources, such as customer databases or information repositories, using TargetPro's Data Manager. The Data Manager guides you through the process of importing from, or linking to, your custom data sources. You can import attribute data such as number of pets per household, sales information, or car registration information and geometry data such as boundaries, sales trade areas, or point data.

Documentation

TargetPro documentation consists of the TargetPro Installation Guide, which details the TargetPro installation process, and this TargetPro User's Guide. For online help for the interface, select HELP > MAPINFO PROFESSIONAL HELP TOPICS from the menu. Each component also has its own documentation. TargetPro's documentation covers the tasks and functionality that you will need to perform analysis and reporting tasks. You may want to refer to the following documents for more detailed information, or for advanced usage: · MapInfo Professional ­ The MapInfo Professional User's Guide and Web-enabled tutorial provide information about the functionality that MapInfo Professional provides. The MapInfo Professional 7.8 User's Guide is available as a free download from the MapInfo website, found at http://www.mapinfo.com/support/documentation/manuals.cfm. Crystal Reports ­ For advanced reporting, refer to the Crystal Reports User's Guide to get the most from this program. The help system can be accessed directly at C:\Program Files\Seagate Software\Crystal Reports\Help\crw.chm. It may be helpful to create a shortcut to this file. Microsoft SQL Server ­ Microsoft SQL Server installs with its own separate set of online documents that are accessible from the START > PROGRAMS menu on your Windows toolbar.

·

·

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

5

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 1: Introduction

About This Book

This book assumes that you are familiar with MapInfo Professional, and that the TargetPro software is installed and running.

User Guide Summary

· · · · · · · TargetPro Features. Getting Started ­ Describes how to get started with TargetPro. Map Concepts ­ Outlines the basic mapping concepts necessary to use TargetPro. Working with Geographies ­ Describes how to display and select standard geographic regions, and how to create custom geographies. Importing and Registering Data ­ Provides an overview of how to import or link to, and register, your custom datasets. Working with Your Data ­ Describes how to modify data properties, perform batch geocoding, create variables, and export data. Managing Profiles ­ Describes how to manage your profiles and cluster groups, and determine the market potential of databases. This helps you understand your customers, segment them, and predict usage for your product based on their profile. Running Reports ­ Describes how to perform analysis using the Reporting tools. You can use an existing report, or create an entirely new custom report using your own data. Running Charts ­ Describes how to run and analyse the charts provided with TargetPro Preparing a Map for Printing ­ Describes how to prepare and print a map. It describes how to add a legend and a scale bar, how to set map scale accuracy, and how to create a map layout.

· · ·

Conventions

Searching

To search for a term or for a topic, refer to the Index at the back of the book. For the definition of a term, please refer to Glossary of Terms on page 189.

Special Notes

Notes of importance are flagged as follows: Note: Information specific to some users or situations is provided as a note.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

6

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

Getting Started

2

This chapter describes how to get started with TargetPro. Before you begin, please be aware that this document assumes that you have access to MapInfo Professional documentation, specifically the MapInfo Professional User's Guide. This is available as a free download from the MapInfo website, found at http://www.mapinfo.com/support/documentation/manuals.cfm.

In this section:

! ! ! ! Starting TargetPro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Learning the Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Setting Project Preferences. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Using the Workspace Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 2: Getting Started

Starting TargetPro

This section describes how to get started with TargetPro by logging in, creating a new project, and understanding how to work with projects.

Logging In

To start TargetPro you will need a user name and a password created for you by your TargetPro Administrator. If you installed TargetPro without the help of an Administrator, it is recommended you use NT Authentication. From your Windows desktop select PROGRAMS > TARGETPRO from the Microsoft Start menu. TargetPro opens and prompts you for login information. Microsoft SQL Server lets you validate user connections using either your Microsoft Windows user account in the Windows network, or using the user name and password assigned by your database administrator. Windows Authentication is recommended for most users.

Please Log In Dialog

SQL Server Authentication is provided for backwards compatibility. The SQL Server Authentication is used in cases such as accessing a server that is located in a different domain from the one you are using. For single machine installations, use Windows Authentication. If you are the only user for TargetPro on a machine, you may want to set TargetPro to start up without showing the Please Log In dialog. Refer to Setting Project Preferences on page 17 for more information on how to do this. Enter your user name and password, and click OK.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

8

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 2: Getting Started

Opening a Project

Create a new project, or open an existing one, from the Welcome dialog.

Welcome Dialog

NEW PROJECT ­ Creates a new project with default settings. Provide a name for the new project. OPEN PROJECT ­ Provides a list of available projects to choose from in the Project Selection dialog. Select a project and click OK, or simply double-click the project you want to open. RECENT PROJECT ­ Automatically launches the last project you worked with. This option is particularly useful when working closely with one project. If you choose Cancel, the Project Selection dialog closes and you are prompted to create a new project. If you choose not to create a new project, the Welcome dialog re-displays.

Working with Projects

TargetPro projects contain information specific to your current session. This information is used to manage the MapInfo Professional workspace specifically tailored for TargetPro, and includes variables, geographies, custom reports, tab files, and information about selected geographies. A project includes information about the window arrangement, zoom level, displayed layers, layer properties, geographic selections, report properties, map layout, map layout properties, and the current state of your work.

Project Selection Dialog

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

9

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 2: Getting Started

Understanding Project Access Rights

By default all projects are private, but the user who created them (the owner) can make them public. Private projects are only available to the project owner. Other users accessing the same TargetPro Server do not see these projects in the Project Selection dialog. The following icon appears next to a project to show it is private.

Private Project Icon

Public projects are accessible to all users connected to the same TargetPro server. Any user can edit, delete, copy, or rename a public project. The following icon appears next to a project to show it is public.

Public Project Icon

Changing a Project's Privileges

To change a project's access privileges in the Project Selection dialog, right-click the project and select MAKE PUBLIC/PRIVATE. The project's icon changes to show it is public or private.

Organizing Projects Into Folders

To organize your projects into folders: 1. Create a new folder. Right-click in the Project Selection dialog and select NEW FOLDER. Enter a name for the folder. The folder is created. 2. Add projects to the folder. Select the project(s) you want to add. Hold down the CTRL key to select multiple projects at once. Right-click and select CUT. Select the folder you just created and paste the project into it. Repeat this for each project you want to add. You can create a folder at the root of the project list if nothing is selected or under an existing folder.

Deleting a Project

To delete a project from the list, select the project, right-click, and select DELETE.

Renaming a Project

To rename a project from the list, select the project, right-click, and select RENAME. Enter the new name for the project.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

10

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 2: Getting Started

Finding a Project or Folder

If you have a large number of projects in the list, you might need to search for the project you want to use. Use the Find functionality to do this. Right-click and select FIND. Enter all, or part of, the project or folder name and click OK. Use FIND NEXT to search for the next item in the list.

Find Project Dialog

Saving a Project

To save a project you are currently working on, choose TARGETPRO > SAVE PROJECT from the TargetPro menu. To save a project under a different name, choose TARGETPRO > SAVE PROJECT AS and enter a new name for the project.

Studying the Project Workspace

After opening or creating a project, the TargetPro workspace displays. It consists of a Key Map window, a Layer Manager dialog listing the layers used in the maps, and a Map window for analysis.

TargetPro Workspace

You can rearrange the windows by selecting TARGETPRO > PREFERENCES > ARRANGE WINDOWS LEFT-HANDED or ARRANGE WINDOWS RIGHT-HANDED. You can undock the windows to resize them.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

11

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 2: Getting Started

Learning the Interface

TargetPro uses the MapInfo Professional environment, but has its own toolbar and menu that display when TargetPro starts up. If you want to display the MapInfo Professional tools and menu in addition to the TargetPro menus, refer to Setting Project Preferences on page 17. This section provides an overview of the TargetPro toolbar and menu. These items are specific to TargetPro analysis, and are discussed in more detail in the rest of this guide.

TargetPro Toolbar

The TargetPro toolbar provides tools for selection, geography creation, drive time and drive distance, as well as tools to run reports, import your data, and find geographies.

New Project button Creates a new TargetPro project.

Open Project button

Opens an existing project.

Save Project button

Saves the current project.

Select Object button

Accesses the Select Object tool to select geographies in the Map window. Also acts as the default pointer/cursor tool. Accesses the Marquee Select tool to select and search for geographies within a given rectangle (marquee box). Accesses the Radius Select tool to select and search for geographies within a circular region. Accesses the Polygon Select tool to select geographies within a polygon that you draw. Accesses the Zoom In tool to get a closer area view of a map or layout. Accesses the Zoom Out tool so you can get a wider area view of a map or layout. Accesses the Pan tool to reposition a map or layout in the Map window. Provides report information about specific geographies on the Analysis Map. Draws a polygon using the Create Polygon tool.

Marquee Select button

Radius Select button

Polygon Select button

Zoom In button

Zoom Out button

Pan button

Quick View button

Create Polygon button

Create Rings button

Draws a series of circles/bands around a selected point.

Find Address button

Finds a point, address, or intersection on the map.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

12

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 2: Getting Started

Buffers Around Set of Points button Drive Time button

Creates buffers around a set of points you have selected on the map. Creates Drive Time polygons on the map.

Drive Distance button

Creates Drive Distance polygons on the map.

Reports button

Accesses the reporting tools, which you can use to create or run a report. Accesses the Thematic Map dialog, which you can use to create thematic maps to display your data. Accesses the Geography Selector dialog, which you can use to select geographies for the current project. Accesses the Profile Manager dialog, which you can use to organize your profiles, cluster, and target groups. Accesses the Data Manager tool to import, register, and manage your custom data sets. Accesses the Capture tool functionality.

Thematic Maps button

Geography Selector button

Profile Manager button

Data Manager button

Capture Tool button

Find Geography button

Accesses the Find Geography tool to search the active layer for a geography. Deletes custom geographies and selections from the Map window.

Delete Geographic Selection button

TargetPro Menu

The TargetPro menu provides TargetPro-specific functionality, which includes project, custom selection, data, reporting, customizing, diagnostics, and exit options.

TargetPro Menu

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

13

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 2: Getting Started

For a description of the MapInfo Professional menus, such as File, Edit, and Format, refer to the online help, or your MapInfo Professional documentation.

Project New Project Open Project Save Project Save Project As Open Recent Project Creates a new TargetPro project. Opens an existing project. Saves the current project. Saves the current project with a new name. Lists the last four recently used projects. Workspaces Add a Layer To This Project > From a Tab File Add a Layer To This Project > From Registered Geographies Workspaces > Import Project Selections Workspaces > Export Project Selections Workspaces > Export To A MapInfo Workspace Adds a MapInfo tab file to the current project. Adds a custom geography layer you imported using the Data Manager to the current project. Imports a set of geographies you selected and saved in a previous session, to the current project. Saves a set of geographies you have selected on the Analysis Map to a tab file. Makes a copy of the current workspace and exports it to MapInfo Professional format. Files you imported using the Data Manager are copied so that they can be opened when the workspace file .WOR is opened in MapInfo Professional. Sets the current workspace as your default when new projects are created. Provides you with a set of options to modify your workspace setup. Workspace Manager should be used with care as changing certain settings in this environment can cause TargetPro to become unstable or unusable. Data Geography Selector Profile Manager Data Manager Selects standard geographies by name for the current project. Manages and organizes profiles, cluster, and target groups. Manages connections to data sources. Reporting Reports Runs a report on selected geographies in the current project. Thematic Mapping Thematic Mapping > Use A Map Layer in Current View Creates a thematic map using a layer currently displayed in the Map window.

Workspaces > Make This The Default Workspace Workspaces > Workspace Manager

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

14

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 2: Getting Started

Thematic Mapping > Use Only Geographies Selected on Map Thematic Mapping > Use All Geographies in Project Thematic Mapping > Thematic Mapping Preferences

Creates a thematic map using geographies currently selected on the Analysis Map. Creates a thematic map on a layer from a project you have opened. Provides you with the option of changing how you want to prepare your thematic maps. You can change options such as color ranges and style. Customizing

Preferences > Arrange Windows Left-Handed Preferences > Arrange Windows Right-Handed Preferences > Undock Windows

Arranges the windows so that the Key Map and Layer Manager windows are on the left-hand side. Arranges the windows, so that the Key Map and Layer Manager windows are on the right-hand side. Used to toggle the mobility of the three TargetPro windows so that they can be moved and resized individually. When the option is checked they can be moved, when it is cleared the windows are docked. Provides you with the ability to change the display and setup of the TargetPro environment. TargetPro Management

Preferences > Preferences Manager

About TargetPro Login As New Quit TargetPro

Displays information about TargetPro. Changes the user information to allow a new user to login. Closes TargetPro.

Key Map

The Key Map helps you locate the area where you are currently working. It shows the area in relation to the Analysis Map by a red rectangle.

Key Map

Note:

The map that you see in the Key Map may be different depending on the data you have licensed.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

15

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 2: Getting Started

To use a different layer from the default for the Key Map, refer to Setting Project Preferences on page 17.

Layer Manager

The Layer Manager lets you add, remove, and modify the behavior of the layers displayed on the Analysis Map. The Layer Manager is always available as a window. It contains entries for each layer on the Analysis Map.

Layer Manager Dialog

Right-clicking on a layer in the Layer Manager displays a pop-up menu of layer options. Refer to Working with Map Layers on page 23 for more information.

Map Window

The Map window displays data visually, and provides the option of displaying the results of analysis you perform in TargetPro. Custom geographies, such as polygons and rings can be drawn on the map, and selected (along with standard geographies) for analysis.

Map Window

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

16

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 2: Getting Started

Setting Project Preferences

Use the TargetPro Preferences Manager to change the default settings that control how TargetPro works. Choose TARGETPRO > PREFERENCES > TARGETPRO PREFERENCES MANAGER.

TargetPro Preferences Manager

Enabling Diagnostics

Select the Enable Diagnostics checkbox to display a message box in the bottom right-hand of the interface. This gives a running commentary of the actions you perform in the application. By default this is not activated.

Diagnostics Message Box

Displaying Login Dialogs

You can turn off the Login Dialog that displays when TargetPro starts up by clearing the SHOW LOGIN DIALOGS checkbox. This makes working with TargetPro more convenient if, for example, you are the only user on a particular machine.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

17

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 2: Getting Started

Displaying Warning Dialogs

TargetPro allows you to turn off the display of warning dialogs in the application. When you do this, warning and information messages are not displayed. Clear the box to turn off Warning dialog display. The default setting is to show the Warning dialogs.

Displaying MapInfo Professional Toolbars and Menus

You can set up TargetPro to show the full suite of MapInfo Professional and menus so that you can use them in conjunction with your TargetPro tools. Check the box to display the tools, clear the box to hide them. By default the toolbars are displayed.

Creating Mappable Files from Reports

This option lets you export any thematic maps you create to a tab file that can be displayed on the Analysis Map.

Showing Key Map and Layer Manager Windows

By default the Key Map and Layer Manager windows are displayed in the left-hand side of the user interface. To hide these windows, clear the check box. This setting persists as a default setting each time you open a project.

Setting a Tab File Import Threshold

TargetPro displays a Warning message if a tab file you are importing has more rows than the number specified here. For example, if you set this value to 500, a warning displays when a table you are importing has more than 500 rows. Note: If you have the Show Warning Dialogs turned off (cleared) this Import Threshold Warning will not display.

Changing the Default Key Map Layer

Click BROWSE to select a table to use as the Key Map Layer. The table name you select displays in the text box and becomes the new default for the Key Map.

Changing the Default Zoom Layering

You can change the Analysis Map zoom layer by entering new minimum and maximum values (in miles) within which you want to display the Analysis Map. For example, if you want the Analysis Map to display between 20 and 500 miles, enter these distances in the MINIMUM and MAXIMUM boxes. For further information refer to Zoom Layering on page 28.

Additional Settings

You can also access the Default Login dialog and Thematic Mapping Preferences dialog from this window. See Changing Thematic Map Preferences on page 31 for more information.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

18

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 2: Getting Started

Using the Workspace Manager

The Workspace Manager lets you change how your workspace is set up. TargetPro uses workspaces to save your work from session to session, so you do not have to reopen tables, recreate maps, and resize windows every time you work with TargetPro. Choose TARGETPRO > WORKSPACES > WORKSPACE MANAGER to launch the workspace manager. It is recommended that you save your project when prompted.

TargetPro Workspace Manager

If you want to use boundary files that are shared on another machine on the network, click LOCATE THE SHARED BOUNDARY FILES, browse to the location, and click OPEN. You can also access the Preferences Manager from this dialog, refer to Setting Project Preferences on page 17. Click RETURN TO TARGETPRO to get back to your previous workspace.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

19

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 2: Getting Started

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

20

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

Map Concepts

3

22 23 26 28 29 33

TargetPro is based on MapInfo Professional's map-based interface. This chapter discusses the basic concepts of working with maps and displaying your results.

In this section:

! ! ! ! ! ! Zooming and Panning the Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Map Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customizing Map Layer Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Zoom Layering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Thematic Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Label Options for a Map Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 3: Map Concepts

Zooming and Panning the Map

You can change the map view by zooming or panning the map contents. You can also change the Key Map view in the same way.

Zooming

Use the ZOOM IN tool to get a closer view of the map contents. Use the ZOOM OUT tool to get a wider view.

Zoom In and Zoom Out Buttons

To change the zoom, click on the map with either the ZOOM IN or ZOOM OUT tool, or draw a marquee box by dragging the cursor.

Marquee box Defining Zoom Area

To use a wheeled mouse, such as the Microsoft IntelliMouseTM, for zooming, move the wheel forward to zoom into the map. Roll back the mouse wheel to zoom out of the map. The wheel has a series of dents; each click is the same as one click with a zoom tool. The mouse wheel does not recenter the view.

Panning

Panning consists of moving the entire map so that the focus is placed on a different location. Use PAN to reposition the map contents within the Map window by clicking and dragging the map in the appropriate direction.

Pan Button

To use a wheeled mouse, such as the Microsoft IntelliMouseTM, for panning: 1. Hold down the wheel and move the mouse to pan the map. 2. Release the wheel to end panning. There are three panning speeds. The speed of the panning is based on the cursor's distance from the starting point, indicated by the origin mark. In the Map window, the distance moved at each speed is a percentage of the zoom distance. For example, the amount to move at slow speed is

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

22

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 3: Map Concepts

.005 * ZoomDistance, medium speed is .01 * ZoomDistance, and super speed is .1 * ZoomDistance. In the corresponding browser, the window is scrolled by 1, 3, and 7 lines or columns for slow, medium, and super speeds. When the cursor is within 15 pixels of the starting point, there is no panning.

Working with Map Layers

Computer maps are organized into layers. Think of the layers as transparencies that are stacked on top of one another. Each layer contains different aspects of the whole map. You can display each table of data in a Map window. Each table displays as a separate layer. Each layer contains different geographies or map objects, such as regions, points, lines, and text. For example, one layer may contain regional boundaries, a second layer may have symbols that represent capital cities, a third layer might consist of text labels. By stacking these layers one on top of the other, you begin to build a complete map. You can display one, two, or many tables at a time.

Map Layers

Map layers form the building blocks of maps in TargetPro. Once you have created your map of layers, you can customize the layers in a variety of ways, add and delete layers, or re-order them.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

23

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 3: Map Concepts

About the Layer Manager

The Layer Manager lets you add, remove, and modify the behavior of the layers displayed on the Analysis Map. The Layer Manager is always available as a window. It contains entries for each layer on the Analysis Map.

Layer Manager Dialog

In the Layer Manager, each layer name is preceded by a THEME PROPERTIES button and a LABELING check box. The currently selected layer (the active layer) is highlighted. There are several ways to interact with the Layer Manager: · Click THEME PROPERTIES to view the Layer Control dialog, which is described in Customizing Map Layer Properties on page 26. Through the Layer Control dialog you can set display and label properties for a layer. Double-click the LABELING check box to set automatic labeling for a layer. This displays labels for the active layer. For information on setting label properties, refer to Setting Label Options for a Map Layer on page 33. · Right-click on the LAYER MANAGER to view a menu of layer options.

·

Layer Manager Dialog: Pop-up menu

These options include: adding or removing a layer, accessing layer properties, moving a layer up or down in the list, selecting geographies in the project, and refreshing the Layer Manager. These options are described in the following sections. For information on setting layer properties using the Display Options dialog, refer to Customizing Map Layer Properties on page 26.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

24

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 3: Map Concepts

Selecting the Active Layer

The active layer is the layer that is currently selected. It is highlighted in the Layer Manager. Layeroriented commands in the Layer Manager's menu such as removing, customizing properties, moving, and adding labels apply to the active layer. To make a layer active, click on the layer name in the Layer Manager. The layer is highlighted in a darker shade.

Adding a Layer to the Map

You might want to add a layer of data to the map for cosmetic reasons or for analysis. If the layer of data is cosmetic, you can add it to the map using the Layer Manager. If the layer is for analysis you must import and register it through the Data Manager; refer to Importing and Registering Data in Chapter 5 on page 63. Then choose TARGETPRO > ADD A LAYER TO THIS PROJECT > FROM REGISTERED GEOGRAPHIES. To add a layer to the map for cosmetic reasons (for example, to view additional information or to prepare a map for printing), right-click on the Layer Manager and select ADD A LAYER. Locate the TAB file that you want to open as a new layer from the Open TAB File dialog.

Removing a Layer from the Map

To remove a layer from the map, highlight and right-click on the layer you want to remove in the Layer Manager, then select REMOVE A LAYER. The layer is removed from the Map window and from the Layer Manager.

Viewing Layer Properties

You can view the display and label properties for a layer from the Layer Control dialog. Right-click on the Layer Manager and select PROPERTIES. A message box displays on the Analysis Map giving information about the selected layer. Click OK.

Browsing a Layer

You can browse a map layer that is currently displayed on the Analysis Map. Right-click in the layer manager window on the layer you want to browse and select BROWSE. A browser window displays the contents of the selected layer in tabular form.

Re-ordering Layers

Map layers display in the order they are listed in the Layer Manager, with the bottom layer drawn first and the top layer drawn last. It is important to order your layers correctly. Consider the situation where you have a layer of customer points and a layer of census tracts. If the layers are incorrectly ordered in the Map window, the customer points might be drawn first and the census tract layer displayed second; your points would be obscured by the census tract layer. To re-order layers, right-click on a layer you want to move in the Layer Manager. Choose MOVE LAYER UP or DOWN to reposition the layer in the list. When you are finished, TargetPro redraws the Analysis Map displaying the layers in the new order.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

25

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 3: Map Concepts

Selecting Geographies

Choose SELECT GEOGRAPHIES option from the Layer Manager's pop-up menu to display the Geography Selector dialog. This dialog lets you select geographies by name. Refer to Selecting Geographies by Name on page 52 for more information.

Refreshing the Layer Manager

To refresh the Layer Manager dialog, right-click and select REFRESH LAYER MANAGER. You may need to do this to reflect changes in the Layer Manager if you have removed, added, or re-ordered layers.

Customizing Map Layer Properties

To modify the display properties for a layer, click the corresponding THEME PROPERTIES button in the Layer Manager.

Theme Properties Button

The Layer Control dialog displays with the active layer highlighted.

Layer Control Dialog

Note:

When using this dialog from the Layer Manager window the check boxes, LAYERS, REORDER, and THEMATIC buttons are not enabled.

From the Layer Control dialog, click DISPLAY to view the Display Options dialog. The Display Options dialog lets you customize the display for each layer in the Map window. You can change the default styles for the layer, set the zoom at which a layer displays, and show line direction, object nodes, and centroids.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

26

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 3: Map Concepts

Display Options Dialog

Display Mode

When you first create a project the boundaries, lines, points, and text display using project defaults. You can change how geography layers display using the Display Mode section of the Display Options dialog. For example, you want to change the display of your streets to a dashed red line. In Layer Control, choose the street layer, click the corresponding THEME PROPERTIES button, and choose DISPLAY from the Layer Control dialog. This brings up the Display Options dialog. Check the STYLE OVERRIDE box to activate STYLE OVERRIDE (large gray buttons). TargetPro only displays the override buttons that are appropriate for the type of objects in the layer. For example, if the layer contains streets, a line style override button displays. Click on it to access the Line Style dialog where you can change the width, style, and color of the streets. If the layer contains labels, a font style override button also displays. For boundary layers, the style override button brings up the Region Style dialog where you can change both the fill and borders of boundaries. The Symbol Style dialog displays when you want to override the style for layers containing symbols or points. The Style Override is only in effect during the current work session, as are the other display settings. To make them permanent, save the project.

Lines, Nodes, and Centroids

The Display Options dialog (page 27) allows you to display line directions, nodes, and object centroids. Select the SHOW LINE DIRECTION checkbox whenever you want to show the direction line objects are drawn. For example, on a street layer, displaying line direction helps you determine in which direction the street numbers go. Select the SHOW NODES check box to display the nodes of objects in a layer. This is helpful for many editing procedures. The Show Centroids box displays the centroids of each object in a layer. In TargetPro, a region's centroid does not represent its center of mass. Instead, the centroid represents the location used for automatic labeling, and geocoding.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

27

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 3: Map Concepts

Zoom Layering

Sometimes you want a map layer to display only at certain zoom levels. Zoom layering controls the display of a map layer so that it displays only when the map's zoom level falls within a preset distance.

Examples of Zoom Layering

For example, you have a layer of streets and a layer of area boundaries. When you zoom out past 10 miles, the streets look like a black smudge in the window. This is because the zoom (window width) is too wide to show detailed street maps. Use zoom layering to tell TargetPro to display the street layer only when the zoom is set to a distance that allows you to see the street detail properly, for instance, less than 5 miles. The first map does not have zoom layering set for its street layer. At a zoom of 15 miles across, notice how difficult it is to see any detail. The second map has zoom layering set to display the streets when the zoom is less than five miles. Therefore, the streets layer does not display when the window is set at 15 miles. To set zoom layering, select a layer in the Layer Control dialog, and choose DISPLAY. Select the DISPLAY WITHIN ZOOM RANGE checkbox to activate the zoom distance boxes. Specify a minimum and maximum distance within which you want the layer to display. Note: You cannot change Display settings for more than one layer at a time.

Different layers in the same Map window can be displayed at different zoom levels. For example, you have a layer of streets, a layer of county boundaries, and a layer of State boundaries. You want the streets layer to be visible only when the zoom level is less than eight miles. You want the county boundary layer to display when the zoom level falls between 20 miles and 200 miles. You want the states boundary layer to be visible only when the zoom level is greater than 100 miles. You can set a different zoom level for every layer in your Map window. Change the zoom level for the whole project by setting the default zoom layering though the PREFERENCES MANAGER. Choose TARGETPRO > PREFERENCES > PREFERENCES MANAGER, then enter the minimum and maximum miles at which you want the map to display.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

28

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 3: Map Concepts

Zoom-layering Labels

You can display labels within a specified zoom range, much the same way that you display map layers within a certain zoom range. Click LABEL in the Layer Control dialog to display the Label Options dialog. In the VISIBILITY section of the Label Options dialog, click DISPLAY WITHIN RANGE. This activates the Min and Max zoom boxes. Fill in the minimum and maximum zoom distances in the appropriate boxes. Label size does not change with zoom or scale changes. Labels display at the size you specify at all zoom levels as well as on printed output. Labels are never hidden behind other geographic objects because they are always the last objects drawn on the map.

Creating a Thematic Map

You can create thematic maps to display data distribution over a specific area. There are three options to create a thematic map: From Current View, From Current Map Selection, and From Geographies in Project. To create a thematic map: 1. Select the geographies to use for the thematic map. This selection is based on the way you want to create the thematic map: · USE A MAP LAYER IN CURRENT VIEW ­ This option creates a thematic map on the geographies currently in view in the map window. Pan to the area on the Analysis Map where you want to create the thematic map. · USE ONLY GEOGRAPHIES SELECTED ON MAP ­ This is based on the geographies currently selected on the Analysis Map. The thematic map is created on the selected areas only. Use the Select tools to choose the geographies on the Analysis Map you want to use for the thematic map. · USE ALL GEOGRAPHIES IN PROJECT ­ This is based on all the geographies in a project you have opened. When the thematic map is created TargetPro re-zooms to allow you to see the whole project in one layer. Select the project which contains the pre-selected geographies using TARGETPRO > OPEN PROJECT. 2. Click either THEMATIC MAP or choose TARGETPRO > THEMATIC MAPPING.

Thematic Map Button

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

29

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 3: Map Concepts

The Thematic Mapping window displays:

Thematic Mapping Window

3. Select the type of thematic map you want to create. Choose the appropriate mapping option from the TargetPro menu or from the Thematic Mapping dialog box. 4. Select a layer on which you want to create your map from the Thematic Map Layer dialog. Click MAP.

Thematic Map Dialog

5. Select a Category or Report variable for your thematic map. Click OK. The thematic map of the selected layer and variable you selected is displayed.

Thematic Map Layout

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

30

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 3: Map Concepts

You can create thematic maps for those layers that are currently registered with the database. The drop-down list in the Find Geography dialog quickly displays a list of available registered layers. You can create a maximum of ten thematic maps at any one time. If you select a category that contains more than ten variables, only the first ten are mapped. Therefore, you should use the Ctrl key to select the variables you want to use. To use all the variables from a folder, first open the folder to register the variables, then highlight it.

Changing Thematic Map Preferences

Change how thematic maps are created and displayed using the Thematic Map Preferences dialog. Choose TARGETPRO > THEMATIC MAPPING > THEMATIC MAPPING PREFERENCES.

Thematic Mapping Preferences Dialog

Changing Application Preferences

Show Thematic Maps In New Windows creates thematic maps in different windows as opposed to the current map window. The Show Legends In New Windows box is selected by default to prevent legends being overwritten by those associated with subsequent thematic maps. If your data has zeros and blank values that you do not want to map, select the checkbox to ignore these values. You can also change the number of thematic ranges TargetPro uses to create thematic maps from the default value of five. You may want to change this number to highlight aspects of the data you are theming. When an option is checked, the setting is turned on, and persists in future sessions until it is cleared.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

31

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 3: Map Concepts

Changing the Thematic Range

TargetPro creates ranged thematic maps. All records are grouped into ranges and each record's object is assigned the color for its corresponding range. TargetPro creates ranges automatically using the following methods, with Equal Ranges as the default setting: · EQUAL RANGES ­ This divides the data records across ranges of equal size. For example, if you have data with values ranging from 1 to 100, the ranges would be: 1-25, 26-50, 5175, and 76-100. EQUAL COUNTS ­ This has the same number of records in each range. If you wanted to group 100 records into 4 ranges, the ranges are calculated so that 25 records fall into each range. NATURAL BREAKS ­ This is a good way of displaying data that is not evenly distributed. The ranges are created using the average of each range. The average of each range is as close as possible to each of the range values in that range. This means the ranges are well-represented by their averages, and the data records within them are fairly close together. STANDARD DEVIATION ­ This creates the middle range break at the mean of your data. The ranges above and below the middle range are one standard deviation above or below the mean.

·

·

·

Changing the Map Color

When creating a ranged thematic map in TargetPro, all records are assigned to a range and then given a color based on that range. By default, TargetPro uses a Bright color palette which uses blue as the lowest to green as the highest. TargetPro provides four different color options to choose from: Brights - Blue to Red; Pastels - Light Blue to Pink; Monochrome - White to Black; and Transparent - Hatch Patterns. To see TargetPro's color palette, you need to open TargetPro's Palette file. To do this, click OPEN PALETTE FILE, and browse to the palette file, found by default at C:\Program Files\MapInfo\TargetPro\exe\Palettes.TAB. Click OPEN to load the palettes into TargetPro. The palettes are loaded into the Color Palettes windows of the Thematic Mapping Preferences dialog. To make thematic maps based on another TargetPro palette, highlight a different color scheme in the Thematic Mapping Preferences dialog. TargetPro also lets you create your own color palette from scratch, or edit an existing TargetPro palette. 1. Ensure TargetPro's palette files are loaded, as outlined previously in this section. 2. Click CREATE/EDIT. If you want to edit an existing palette, highlight it first. The Palette Editor dialog displays.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

32

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 3: Map Concepts

Palette Editor Dialog

3. Edit the Palette options. Enter a new name for the palette, and click START and END STYLE to select new color and fill patterns. Also choose between RGB (Red, Green, Blue) and HSL (Hue, Saturation, Luminance), color models. Click OK. 4. Highlight your new palette in the Color palette window in the Thematic Mapping Preferences dialog and click OK. Note: Color palettes can be changed for each user.

Setting Label Options for a Map Layer

You can change how labels are displayed for a map layer as shown in Layer Control Dialog on page 26. Click THEME PROPERTIES for a layer in the Layer Manager to view the Layer Control dialog. It displays with the active layer highlighted. In the Layer Control dialog, click LABEL to view the Label Options dialog. This dialog lets you adjust the visibility, style, and position of the labels.

Label Options Dialog

Note:

The Labeling check box in the Layer Manager must be selected to view labels for a layer.

TargetPro 4.7

© 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

33

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 3: Map Concepts

Labeling Using a Column

The content of labels is controlled in the Label Options dialog. You can label an object with any column from its associated table. For example, you can label the states table with the state name, abbreviation, 1990 population, or any other field in the table. Simply choose a column from the list, and the objects in that layer will be labeled with the information contained in that column.

Labeling with Expressions

Label objects can be labeled with an expression. Select EXPRESSION from the drop-down list in the Label Options dialog. Create the expression in the Expression dialog. You can type the expression directly or use the drop-down lists to create it. For example, you want to label geographic regions with their name and population density on two lines. Your table contains the names and population figures for each region. To calculate the population density, divide population by each region's area. You can let MapInfo calculate the area of each region using the Area function in the Expression dialog. To create the expression, in Layer Control, highlight the table of geographic regions and choose LABEL. Select EXPRESSION from the LABEL WITH: drop-down list in the Label Options dialog. The Expression dialog displays. Using the drop-down lists, create the following expression:

Region + Chr$(13) + POPULATION / Area(Object, "sq mi")

The Chr$(13) function tells MapInfo to add a carriage return to the first line. Now using the Label tool, click on a region. MapInfo labels it with the result of the expression.

Setting Layer Visibility

You can turn labeling on or off for the active layer directly from the Layer Manager or indirectly in the Label Options dialog. The recommended method is to set labeling through the Layer Manager. In the Label Options dialog, the check boxes on the right side of the Visibility group control which labels are displayed, and how they will appear on the map: · · · ALLOW DUPLICATE TEXT ­ Allows duplicate labels for different objects to display. This option is often used with street maps to label street segments individually. ALLOW OVERLAPPING TEXT ­ Allows labels to be drawn on top of each other. LABEL PARTIAL SEGMENTS ­ Labels polylines whose centroids are not visible in the Map window.

To specify the maximum number of labels to display on the map, type the number in the MAXIMUM LABELS box.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

34

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 3: Map Concepts

Setting Label Style

In the Label Options dialog, use the STYLE options to modify the label and text object styles. Choose TEXT STYLE to view the Text Style dialog. Within this dialog you can set the font style and size, text color, effects (such as bold or underline), and background options. There are three background options: · · · NONE ­ Sets off background. HALO ­ Creates a halo effect around the text. This puts the text into relief from whatever it covers. For example part of a region, or a street. BOX ­ Creates a background box behind the text.

When you choose either the Box or Halo backgrounds, the Color list is activated. Click on it to choose a color for the halo or the background. A palette of color choices displays. The color you choose corresponds to the button that is currently activated. The color displays in the box and in the sample.

Text Style Dialog

In the Label Options dialog, also set the styles for text objects. There are three text object settings to choose from: NONE, SIMPLE, and ARROW. If you selected either SIMPLE or ARROW, then choose TEXT OBJECT to view the Line Style dialog and make line style settings. Within the Line Style dialog you can set the style and color of the text object (line), and its width.

Line Style Dialog

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

35

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 3: Map Concepts

Positioning Labels

In the Label Options dialog, use the Anchor Point options to specify the label's placement. The anchor point is the label's position relative to the map object. Click on one of the buttons to select an anchor point. For example, place labels above and to the left of the anchor point. The anchor point is an ongoing attribute of the label. For example, if you anchor a point object's label at Center left and you increase the label's font size, the text will grow to the left. This way, the text can never overwrite the point. The default anchor point varies with the type of map object you are labeling: · · · Regions default to Center. Lines default to above Center. Points default to right.

If you are working with a layer that has line objects such as a street map, select the ROTATE LABEL WITH LINE checkbox to position the labels parallel to the lines. Label offset is how far away a label is from its anchor point. Specify the number of points you want the label to be from the anchor point in the LABEL OFFSET box. The label's anchor point and offset move a label with respect to its current location and the current zoom. Whenever you want to make minor adjustments to the label's position, you should use these two options. You can also select and drag an individual label on the Map window to move it, but this is not recommended because you are actually moving the label location on the map. If you drag a label a few pixels, the distance you move it is in the current map units, regardless of the zoom. For example, if you are displaying a map of the United States and drag New York state's label a few pixels, at that zoom, the label looks fine. However, if the Map Units distance is in miles and you zoom in on New York state, the label will display much further away than at the previous zoom.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

36

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

Working with Geographies

4

Most TargetPro workflows begin with a geographic selection. This chapter describes how to display and select registered geographies and how to create custom geographies. Census/Administrative levels such as States, Counties, Market levels such as DMAs, and Postal levels such as ZIP Codes, have well-defined and recognizable boundaries. There are a number of ways to work with geographic regions, including displaying regions on the map, and selecting regions to use in analysis. Custom geographies you can create are points with rings, drive times, drive distances, and polygons. After you create custom geographies, you can use them for analysis.

In this section:

! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! Finding a Geography on the Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Custom Geographies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Custom Geographies with MapInfo Professional . . . Deleting Geographies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying a Custom Geography Label Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting Geographies on the Map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting Geographies by Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Geography Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Trade Areas Using the Capture Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 39 49 55 50 50 52 55 56

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 4: Working with Geographies

Finding a Geography on the Map

There are several ways to find a geography on the Analysis Map using MapInfo Professional tools. For example using QUERY > SQL QUERY or navigating across the map to find the geography you need. However, it is recommended that you use the Find Geography tool when working with TargetPro. You can use the Find Geography tool to view a geography on the map either by name or by geographic key: This tool can find any geographic level that is registered and currently open in the project. For example, if you have used TARGETPRO > ADD A LAYER TO PROJECT > FROM REGISTERED GEOGRAPHIES to open a registered layer, it can be searched using the Find Geography tool. 1. Select FIND GEOGRAPHY on the TargetPro toolbar.

Find Geography Button

The Find Geography dialog displays.

Find Geography Dialog

2. Select the layer that you want to search. 3. Enter the name of the geography you want to find. You can use a wildcard to search the registered layers on the Analysis Map. For example, search the States layer for the Name New %. 4. Click FIND. The geography is selected on the Analysis Map. If more than one geography matches the search requirements, TargetPro displays a list of candidates.

Find Candidates Dialog Box

Click FIND to locate a candidate on the Analysis Map.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

38

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 4: Working with Geographies

Creating Custom Geographies

You can create several types of custom geographies for analysis: points, rings, and polygons. You can create a site, or point with rings, directly on the Analysis Map, from a street address, intersection, or longitude/latitude value.

Creating a Point

There are several reasons why you might need to create a point on the Analysis Map. The most common situation is that you want to create a point of reference on the Analysis Map. You might also want to create points to use when creating trade areas using the Capture tool. Refer to Creating Trade Areas Using the Capture Tool on page 56 for more information. You might also need to create individual points to use for Creating Buffers Around a Set of Points on page 41. To create a single point, or site, on the Analysis Map using the Create Rings tool: 1. Click CREATE RINGS on the TargetPro toolbar.

Create Rings Button

2. Click on the Analysis Map where you want to create the point. The Site Properties dialog displays. 3. Select the SITE ONLY checkbox. This grays out the Trade Area(s) section of the dialog that is used when creating a point with rings.

Site Properties Dialog: Site Only

4. Enter a name for the new point, and optionally refine the longitude and latitude values. 5. Click OK. The new point is created and displayed on the Analysis Map.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

39

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 4: Working with Geographies

A Point Displayed on the Analysis Map

Creating a Point with Rings

To create a point with rings, use the Create Rings tool. 1. Click CREATE RINGS on the TargetPro toolbar.

Create Rings Button

2. Click on the Analysis Map where you want to create the point with rings. The Site Properties dialog displays. It has three frames: Label, Center, and Trade Area(s).

Ring Properties Dialog

3. Enter a name for the set of rings in the Label textbox (optional). By default the point with rings is labeled incrementally as Point#. Optionally change this name to one more meaningful to your analysis. Optionally change the properties of the label by clicking LABEL FONT and changing the font style, color, background and effects.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

40

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 4: Working with Geographies

4. Modify the center point of the rings (optional). Within the Center frame you can move the center point's location by entering new Longitude and Latitude values (in map units). Optionally change the style of the point by clicking SYMBOL STYLE and changing the symbol style, size, and color. 5. Choose to create Standard or Banded Trade Area(s). Standard trade areas are concentric, overlapping regions with each area originating from the centre point. Banded trade areas are concentric, non-overlapping regions where each area starts where the last one ended. The default setting is Standard with To and From values of 0 to 1, 3, and 5 miles. Use the following buttons to modify the trade areas: · · · · ADD ­ Adds a new trade area. CHANGE ­ Modifies a selected value. DELETE ­ Removes to a selected value. CLEAR ALL ­ Removes all the values.

Optionally edit the line style used to display the trade areas by clicking PEN STYLE. 6. Select the Set as Default checkbox (optional). This makes the current settings in the Site Properties dialog the default. The next time you create a point with rings these values are displayed in the dialog. 7. Click OK to create the point with rings.

Creating Buffers Around a Set of Points

You may want to create buffers around a set of points you have in a TAB file or displayed on the Analysis Map. Use the Buffers Around Set of Points tool to do this. 1. Create or display the input points. Create the individual points on the Analysis Map; refer to Creating a Point on page 39, or import a TAB file of points. To do this choose ADD A LAYER TO THIS PROJECT > FROM A TAB FILE from the TargetPro menu. Browse to the TAB file that contains the points and click OPEN. Ensure that the layer that contains your points is moved to the top of the Layer Manager window to ensure the points are selectable, and visible, on the Analysis Map. 2. Select the points to use as the center points for the rings. Refer to Selecting Geographies on the Map on page 50 to select the points to create the buffers. 3. Click BUFFERS AROUND SET OF POINTS on the TargetPro toolbar.

Buffers Around Set of Points Button

The Site Properties dialog displays with the Label and Longitude/Latitude fields disabled (these fields are already known).

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

41

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 4: Working with Geographies

4. Choose to create Standard or Banded Trade Area(s). Standard trade areas are concentric, overlapping regions with each area originating from the centre point. Banded trade areas are concentric, non-overlapping regions where each area starts where the last one ended. The default setting is Standard with To and From values of 0 to 1, 3, and 5 miles. Use the following buttons to modify the trade areas: · · · · ADD ­ Adds a new trade area CHANGE ­ Modifies a selected value DELETE ­ Removes to a selected value CLEAR ALL ­ Removes all the values.

Optionally edit the line style used to display the trade areas by clicking PEN STYLE. 5. Select the Set as Default checkbox (optional). This makes the current settings in the Site Properties dialog the default. These are the initial values that display the next time this dialog appears. 6. Click OK to create the buffers around the points.

Creating a Point with Rings from an Address

To create a point with rings from an address: 1. Select FIND ADDRESS on the TargetPro toolbar.

Find Address Button

The Find a Point Wizard displays.

Find A Point Wizard: Please select the type of point

2. Choose Street Address, then click NEXT.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

42

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 4: Working with Geographies

3. Enter the address information. You do not need to enter a complete address. Entering the following information will provide you with an address match: · · · Street address, suite number (optional), City, and State. Street address, suite number (optional), City, and ZIP Code. Street address, suite number (optional), State, and ZIP Code

Find a Point Wizard: Enter street address

4. Click FIND. When a match is found, its longitude and latitude values display. Click CLEAR to remove the address information. 5. Click NEXT after finding the address match. NEXT only displays when a match has been found. The Site Properties dialog displays with the address you entered as the center point. Refer to Creating a Point with Rings on page 40 for information on how to complete the settings in this dialog. 6. Click OK to create the point with rings.

Creating a Point with Rings from a Street Intersection

To create a point with rings from a street intersection: 1. Select FIND ADDRESS on the TargetPro toolbar.

Find Address Button

The Find a Point Wizard displays. 2. Choose Street Intersection and click NEXT. 3. Enter the street intersection information. Enter the street names and any address information that you have. You need to provide either a City name or a valid ZIP code for the geocoding to be successful.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

43

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 4: Working with Geographies

Alternatively you can enter the two streets you want to use joined with && in the Street textbox. For example: 10 ST && 41 EAGLE ST

Find a Point Wizard: Enter intersection information

4. Click FIND. When a match is found, its longitude and latitude values display. Click CLEAR to remove the address information. 5. Click NEXT after finding the address match. NEXT only displays when a match has been found. The Site Properties dialog displays. Refer to Creating a Point with Rings on page 40 for information on how to complete the settings in this dialog. 6. Click OK to create the point with rings.

Creating a Point with Rings Using Longitude/Latitude

To create a point with rings by specifying Longitude/Latitude: 1. Select FIND ADDRESS on the TargetPro toolbar.

Find Address Button

The Find a Point Wizard displays. 2. Choose Latitude/Longitude Coordinate, then click NEXT.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

44

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 4: Working with Geographies

3. Enter the Latitude and Longitude of the location to find. You can also enter the location name (optional).

Find a Point Wizard: Enter latitude and longitude

4. Click NEXT to display the Site Properties dialog. Refer to Creating a Point with Rings on page 40 for information on how to complete the settings in this dialog. 5. Click OK to create the point with rings.

Creating a Polygon

Use the Create Polygon tool to draw polygons. These polygons can be selected and used as study sites for your analysis. To create a polygon: 1. Click CREATE POLYGON in the TargetPro toolbar.

Create Polygon Button

2. Click on a starting point for the polygon on the map. Continue to click on the Analysis Map to add segments to the polygon.

Creating a Polygon Using the Create Polygon Tool

Click on the start point to close the polygon.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

45

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 4: Working with Geographies

3. Enter a name. The default name for the polygon is PolygonN. If you want to change this, provide a new name in the Area Properties dialog, and click OK. The polygon is labeled and highlighted on the map. If you made a mistake when drawing the polygon, click CANCEL to discard it.

Creating Drive Time and Drive Distance Trade Areas

You can create trade areas that show the region that can be driven to within a set time (in minutes) or distance (in kilometers or miles) from a given point. The trade areas are shaded to show bands of driving time or distance from the start point.

Creating Drive Time Trade Areas

To create drive time trade areas: 1. Click DRIVE TIME in the TargetPro toolbar.

Drive Time Button

2. Click on the Analysis Map in the place you want to be the center point for the drive time trade areas. The Site Properties dialog displays.

Site Properties Dialog: Drive Time

3. Enter a name for the drivetime trade areas in the Label textbox (optional). By default the drive time trade areas are labeled incrementally as Point#. Optionally change this name to one more meaningful to your analysis. Optionally change the properties of the label by clicking LABEL FONT and changing the font style, color, background and effects. 4. Modify the center point of the trade areas (optional). Within the Center frame you can move the center point's location by entering new Latitude and Longitude values (in map units).

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

46

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 4: Working with Geographies

Optionally change the style of the point by clicking SYMBOL STYLE and changing the symbol style, size, and color. 5. Choose to create Standard or Banded Trade Area(s). Standard trade areas are concentric, overlapping regions with each area originating from the centre point. Banded trade areas are concentric, non-overlapping regions where each area starts where the last one ended. The default setting is Standard with To and From values of 0 to 5, 10, and 15 minutes. Use the following buttons to modify the trade areas: · · · · ADD ­ Adds a new trade area. CHANGE ­ Modifies a selected value. DELETE ­ Removes to a selected value. CLEAR ALL ­ Removes all the values.

Optionally edit the line style used to display the trade areas by clicking PEN STYLE. 6. Select the Set as Default checkbox (optional). This makes the current settings in the Site Properties dialog the default. The next time you create drive time trade areas, these values are displayed in the dialog. 7. Click OK to create the drive time trade areas.

Example of Drive Time Trade Areas

Creating Drive Distance Trade Areas

To create drive distance trade areas: 1. Click DRIVE DISTANCE in the TargetPro toolbar.

Drive Distance Button

2. Click on the Analysis Map in the place you want to be the center point for the drive distance trade areas. The Site Properties dialog displays.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

47

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 4: Working with Geographies

Site Properties Dialog: Drive Distance

3. Enter a name for the drive distance trade areas in the Label textbox (optional). By default the drive distance trade areas are labeled incrementally as Point#. Optionally change this name to one more meaningful to your analysis. Optionally change the properties of the label by clicking LABEL FONT and changing the font style, color, background and effects. 4. Modify the center point of the trade areas (optional). Within the Center frame you can move the center point's location by entering new Latitude and Longitude values (in map units). Optionally change the style of the point by clicking SYMBOL STYLE and changing the symbol style, size, and color. 5. Choose to create Standard or Banded Trade Area(s). Standard trade areas are concentric, overlapping regions with each area originating from the centre point. Banded trade areas are concentric, non-overlapping regions where each area starts where the last one ended. The default setting is Standard with To and From values of 0 to 1, 3, and 5 miles. Use the following buttons to modify the trade areas: · · · · ADD ­ Adds a new trade area. CHANGE ­ Modifies a selected value. DELETE ­ Removes to a selected value. CLEAR ALL ­ Removes all the values.

Optionally edit the line style used to display the trade areas by clicking PEN STYLE. 6. Select the Set as Default checkbox (optional). This makes the current settings in the Site Properties dialog the default. The next time you create drive distance trade areas, these values are displayed in the dialog.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

48

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 4: Working with Geographies

7. Click OK to create the drive distance trade areas.

Example of Drive Distance Trade Areas

Creating Custom Geographies with MapInfo Professional

You may want to create custom geographies using MapInfo Professional tools that you can use in your analysis when running reports. 1. Move the Custom Selection layer. The custom selection layer has the same name as the current project; it should be at the top of the list of layers in the Layer Manager. Refer to Re-ordering Layers on page 25 for information on how to do this. 2. Display the MapInfo Professional Tools. If you cannot see the MapInfo Professional toolbars in the interface, choose TARGETPRO > PREFERENCES > PREFERENCES MANAGER. Select the Show MapInfo Professional Toolbars checkbox. Several toolbars can be displayed when this option is enabled; alter the checkbox settings under OPTIONS > TOOLBARS to show just the tools you need. 3. Draw the custom geographies. Draw geographies using the Rectangle, Polygon, or Ellipse drawing tools. Refer to the MapInfo Professional documentation for more detailed information. 4. Select the geographies you want to use for your report. Refer to Selecting Geographies on the Map on page 50. 5. Begin your reporting session as outlined in Running a Standard Report on page 144.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

49

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 4: Working with Geographies

Modifying a Custom Geography Label Style

You can change the display settings for each individual label belonging to a custom geography. Double-click on the label to view the Label Style dialog.

Label Style Dialog

Within the Label Style dialog you can set the following: · · · FONT ­ Click FONT to change the font style. In the text style dialog that displays, you can set the font style, text color, background label type and color, and text effects. ANCHOR POINT ­ Label position relative to the anchor point. LINE ­ Selecting Simple draws a line from the label to the anchor point. Selecting Arrow draws an arrow from the label to the anchor point. (To increase the distance between the label and the anchor point, increase the offset value). Clicking LINE STYLE displays the Line Style dialog. Within this dialog you can set line style, color, and width. ROTATION ANGLE ­ Set the rotation of the label in degrees. OFFSET ­ The distance in points between the label and the anchor point. LABEL ­ Here you have the option of changing the label text. You can change the label styles for an entire map layer through the Layer Control dialog's LABEL button. For more information, refer to Setting Label Options for a Map Layer on page 33.

· · · Note:

Selecting Geographies on the Map

After creating and displaying geographies on the map, you can select them to use in your analysis. To select a geography from the map, simply click SELECT OBJECT on the TargetPro toolbar and then click the geography that you want to select from the Map Window.

Select Object Button

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

50

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 4: Working with Geographies

Selecting Non-Contiguous Geographies

To make multiple selections of non-contiguous geographies, hold down SHIFT while selecting geographies. You can select standard geographies that are not in the top layer so long as the layer is set to selectable in the Layer Control dialog. To open the Layer Control dialog, right-click on the map and choose LAYER CONTROL from the pop-up menu. You can select as many objects as you want from one layer, using the SHIFT key, then choose TARGETPRO > GEOGRAPHY SELECTOR to add the geographies to the list of selected geographies. Repeat this with geographies from any other layer you want to use. Note: Do not use the Layer Control dialog that displays when you select THEME PROPERTIES from the Layer Manager for this operation.

Make the map layers selectable by ensuring the SELECTABLE check box is selected.

Selectable Icon

Custom geographies reside in the project layer, which is selectable by default. To select a geography masked by another geography, use CTRL on your keyboard. For example, to select a geographic region that is obscured by a set of trade areas, hold down CTRL and keep clicking on the target region until it is selected. You should be able to see when the target region is selected by the shape of the selection pattern.

Selecting Contiguous Geographies

To select multiple contiguous geographies, use one of the contiguous geography selection tools:

Marquee Select button Accesses the Marquee Select tool so you can select and search for map objects within a given rectangle (marquee box). Accesses the Radius Select tool so you can select and search for map objects within a circular region. Accesses the Polygon Select tool so you can select objects within a polygon that you draw.

Radius Select button Polygon Select button

Geographies within or overlapping the marquee area are selected.

Selecting Geographies From a Browser

You can select geographies to display in the Map window directly from the layer table. Select WINDOW > NEW BROWSER WINDOW from the main menu. In the Browse Table dialog, choose the layer from which you want to select geographies.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

51

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 4: Working with Geographies

Browse Table Dialog

Another option is to right-click on the layer you want to explore in the LAYER MANAGER window and choose BROWSE. The layer table displays in a Browser window. Click the square box for the geography (row in the table) that you want to select. To select several geographies, use the CTRL or SHIFT key as you click. The selected geography is highlighted in the Map window.

Browser Window

If the Browser window disappears behind the Map window, you can bring it to the front again. Select WINDOW from the main menu, and choose BROWSER from the list of open dialogs.

Selecting Geographies by Name

In addition to selecting geographies from the map, you can select them by name through the Geography Selector dialog. This is convenient so not all the selections need to be made on the Analysis Map. The Geography Selector dialog lets you select multiple geographic regions by name to make them available for reporting purposes. Your selections are not displayed on the map. You can access the Geography Selector dialog by clicking GEOGRAPHY SELECTOR in the TargetPro toolbar.

Geography Selector Button

You can also choose TARGETPRO > GEOGRAPHY SELECTOR.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

52

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 4: Working with Geographies

Geography Selector Dialog

In the Geography Selector dialog: 1. Find your selection. Expand the folders for the type of region that you want to find from the Available Geographies list. Continue expanding the hierarchy of geographies to find your selection. You can also search for a geography by right-clicking on the Available Geographies box, and choosing Find from the pop-up menu. Enter the name of the geography to search for. TargetPro searches for the name through the list and displays any matching names. 2. Select the geography. Highlight your selection, and double-click, or click the right arrow button (>) to move it, or the geographies beneath it, to the Selected Geographies list. Refer to Examples of Selecting Geographies on page 54 for more information. 3. Remove additional geographies. If you want to remove an item from the Selected Geographies list, simply double-click it, or highlight one or more items and click the back arrow (<). To select all the items in the list, right-click the Selected Geographies box and choose SELECT ALL from the pop-up menu. From the pop-up menu you can also choose INVERT SELECTION, SELECT NONE to cancel the current selection, CLEAR SELECTED to remove highlighted items, or CLEAR ALL to remove all items from the listbox. Invert Selection highlights all the items that were not previously highlighted. 4. Click OK to complete your selection. Click APPLY to set your selection without closing the Geography Selector dialog.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

53

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 4: Working with Geographies

Examples of Selecting Geographies

The geographies in this dialog are organized in a "select within" arrangement. This means there are some differences in how you make your selections. If the geography you select is not at the bottom-level node of the geography tree, the geography is selected as a singe entity. If it is at the bottom of the tree, the entire folder of geographies is selected. For example, if you select Abbeville, SC in U.S. Counties, the single county is moved when you click the right arrow button (>). However, if you select the U.S. Zip Codes subfolder of Abbeville, the six geographies in the folder are moved when you click the right arrow button (>). This is because it is lower in the geography tree. The following is another example of how to select geographies: · · To select Florida as a single geographic region ­ Expand the Nation folder, then the State folder, then click the Florida folder and click the right arrow (>) button. To select several counties in Florida ­ Expand Nation > State > Florida > U.S. Counties. Hold down SHIFT or CTRL to select the counties you need and click the right arrow (>) button.

Selecting Geographies Within or Overlapped by a Region

TargetPro enables you to select smaller geographies within a larger region. For example you can select all the counties within New York State. To do this you select New York from the list of States, then click SELECT BY. The Select Geographies Within / Overlap by dialog displays:

Select Geographies Within/Overlap by Dialog

Select U.S. Counties from this list. This selects all the counties that lie within, or are overlapped by, New York State. Choose to replace the existing New York selection with the counties, or add the counties to the selection. Click OK.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

54

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 4: Working with Geographies

Working with Geography Selections

Within a project, any geography selected for reporting is treated like an attribute of the project. You will see it listed as a selected feature in the Geography Selector dialog. This means that it is available for selection every time you generate a report. You have the option of saving selected features to a MapInfo table (TAB file), so that you can retrieve the selection at a later date, or from other projects within a workspace.

Saving the Current Selection

You can save the selected geographies to a TAB file, so that you can use them in other projects or future sessions. To do this, select TARGETPRO > WORKSPACES > EXPORT PROJECT SELECTIONS from the menu. Within the Save Custom Selections dialog, enter a file name and click SAVE.

Displaying Previous Selections

To display geographies you previously exported to a workspace, select TARGETPRO > IMPORT PROJECT SELECTIONS from the menu. Within the Open Objects Table dialog, select the table of geographies to open and click OPEN. The previously selected geographies display on the map.

Deleting Geographies

Use the Delete Selection tool to delete both custom and standard geographies. This tool enables you to remove any standard geographies you had selected using the Geography Selector. Any custom geographies are removed from the list of selected geographies and destroyed permanently. To delete a geography: 1. Click DELETE GEOGRAPHIC SELECTION in the TargetPro toolbar.

Delete Geographic Selection Button

2. Select the geography you want to delete.

Delete Selection Dialog

Select DELETE ALL to remove all the listed geographies. 3. Click OK to delete the geographies.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

55

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 4: Working with Geographies

Creating Trade Areas Using the Capture Tool

TargetPro's Capture Tool enables you to find a specified amount of customers that lie within a certain distance of a given location. For example, you might have some potential store locations that you have displayed on the Analysis Map as one or more points. You can select the points and find the closest 80% of customers to those locations. Once you have captured a segment of customers around multiple store locations and created trade areas, you can create profiles of these customers, run reports and create thematic maps on the areas to compare and to find the best potential location for a new store. There are two main options for capturing a section of customers; using a customer dataset or using a market demographic. Any customer dataset you want to use must have previously been registered in TargetPro using the Data Manager (refer to Registering Data in Chapter 5 on page 74). You also have the option of joining the store locations with a point dataset you have registered in TargetPro so you can associate the information in that dataset with the store locations. The Capture Tool provides a distance-based trade area creation methodology. For a customer point dataset the longitude and latitude of the points are used for distance calculations; for market demographics, the centroids stored and registered with the boundaries are used.

Creating Trade Areas Using a Customer Dataset

This section describes using a point file that has been registered with Data Manager to create trade areas around potential store locations. This type of capture can be used when you know there is an attribute from the input sites that is also reflected in the point dataset you intend to use to create the dataset. If you want to create trade areas using boundary data, follow the instructions in Creating Trade Areas Using a Market Demographic on page 60 1. Select input points. Refer to Selecting Geographies on the Map on page 50 to select the site locations you want to use as the study sites. 2. Click CAPTURE TOOL in the TargetPro toolbar.

Capture Tool Button

3. Select a label and join field.

Capture Tool: Label and Join Field Dialog

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

56

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 4: Working with Geographies

Choose a label for the points you selected on the Analysis Map. This label field is used to provide descriptions for the trade areas that result from this capture session. If the point dataset you want to use has a field in common with the sites you selected on the Analysis Map, choose the field from the store locations to join the input points with the registered dataset. For example, each site location selected on the Analysis Map may have a City field. If the dataset also has a corresponding City field, TargetPro can use that field to link the two datasets together. TargetPro can then optionally create trade areas based on attributes from the linked registered dataset. If this option is used, then for each site location, TargetPro selects only the customers that share the same City as the site. Refer to the Example that Illustrates the Use of the Join Field on page 59 for more information. Note: If the selected input points come from the MapInfo Professional layer, this dialog is disabled. In this case, the labels are automatically generated using a convention that includes the longitude and latitude of each point in the label.

Click OK. 4. Choose the source of the customer data. All the information required to create the trade areas is entered in the Capture Tool dialog. The following is an example of a completed dialog:

Capture Tool: Create Trade Areas using a Customer Dataset

Select CUSTOMER DATASET to create trade areas using a registered customer dataset. 5. Select a geographic area level. Once you have selected Customer Dataset, a list of point datasets that have previously been registered with TargetPro displays in the Select Customer Point Level box. The dataset you select is used to search for records to create the trade areas.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

57

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 4: Working with Geographies

6. Select a Geography/StoreId Field (optional). This step applies only if the store locations you selected can be associated individually with the registered dataset and you joined a table in step 3. The Geography/StoreId field lists the variables that were registered against that dataset when it was registered. Choose the variable that contains the Store Id information for each store, then specify which individual record corresponds to each store selected on the Analysis Map. 7. Provide a name for the trade area dataset. This name is used to identify the resulting trade areas in SQL Server and in the Geography Selector tree. By default it is the name of the customer point level dataset you selected. 8. Enter a Threshold Percentage or Value. Choose to accumulate a percentage of counts, or an attribute of the customer dataset such as number of visits or amount spent. If you choose a Value of 30000, TargetPro attempts to accumulate up to 30,000 points from the dataset you selected (if the dataset contains this many points). However the maximum distance set in step 10 also contributes to the resulting trade areas. The numbers often exceed the specified threshold due to TargetPro's trade area calculations. If you choose 80%, the trade area that is created for each store location will contain 80% of the total count of points in the dataset. 80% is often used because it is generally considered that the closest 80% of customers are the real customers of a store location. The interpretation of the threshold percentage or value depends on the selection methodology you choose. For example, if you choose the Total Attribute Value methodology described in step 9, and specify an OrderAmount column for the attribute field, a value of 30000 would mean that the trade area would contain enough customers to produce an aggregate order amount of $30,000. 9. Select a Customer Selection Methodology. Choose how the customers should be accumulated within the distance you specified. There are two options: · · DISTANCE TO STORE (CUSTOMER COUNTS) ­ The number of customers within the distance specified. DISTANCE TO STORE (TOTAL ATTRIBUTE VALUE) ­ An attribute in the point dataset that describes the customers. For example, number of visits made, or amount spent. Select an attribute from the dataset to use for this calculation. 10. Enter the maximum distance. This is the maximum distance TargetPro will use to calculate the trade area. For example, if you choose 10 miles, and TargetPro has looked in this radius around the store location and has not found the value or percentage of records you specified in the threshold, it uses the values it has within 10 miles to create the trade areas. This might be significantly less than the value you originally specified. Conversely, if TargetPro has found more than 30,000 households within a 10-mile radius of the store, it uses the 30,000 households closest to the store location to create the trade area.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

58

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 4: Working with Geographies

Note:

It is important to choose the maximum distance with care. TargetPro surveys the entire radius around each store location for information. If the maximum distance is set too high, TargetPro may spend time looking for records unnecessarily.

11. Choose a Trade Area Creation Methodology. Once TargetPro has selected the records to use in the trade area, this selection defines how the trade areas are created. There are three options: · CONVEX HULL ­ Takes the farthest points from the store location and joins each one to form the trade area. The store location is also included to ensure the trade area includes the store. A minimum of three points are required. If zero or one customer records are found, TargetPro defaults to the radius methodology. NEIGHBORHOOD COVERAGE AREA ­ Choose a level to create the NCA; a common choice is U.S. ZIP Codes. TargetPro selects each ZIP that contains a count and fills in the ZIPs between them to try and create a contiguous area. The fill decisions are based on centroid distance calculations. If there are ZIPs that are associated with two trade areas, they are not shared; the ZIP is assigned to the closest store location. If no records are associated with a store, no trade area is created for that store. · RADIUS ­ Creates rings for the trade areas which use the distance between the store location and the farthest customer identified (not exceeding the maximum distance you specified in step 10) as the radius. If zero records are found and there is one input store, the maximum distance threshold specified in the Capture Tool dialog is used. If there is more that one input store, the radius is computed as half the distance to the closest store. 12. Create the Trade Areas. Click FINISH. TargetPro creates and registers the trade areas and automatically displays them on the Analysis Map. These trade areas can then be used to run reports and create thematic maps. The performance of these reports is good because the data has been registered.

·

Example that Illustrates the Use of the Join Field

Consider the following example that shows how the Join field can be used to create trade areas. In this example there is a single store location and a customer dataset that shows the number of visits to a city. Store Location There is one input point. It is a store location in Arlington Heights.

Label Point 1 City Arlington Heights

Customer Dataset There are two rows of information in the table that will be used to create the trade areas.

City Arlington Heights Number of Visits 150

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

59

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 4: Working with Geographies

City Cookstown

Number of Visits 45

If you decide to join the two datasets, you would use the City field because it is common to them both. When TargetPro creates the trade areas, only the Arlington Heights point in the customer dataset would be considered; the Cookstown point would be discarded, because it does not match on the join field. If you decide not to join the two datasets, both the customer points would be used to create the trade areas.

Creating Trade Areas Using a Market Demographic

This section describes creating trade areas around a selection of store locations using a market demographic as the basis for the trade area. If you want to create trade areas using a customer point dataset that has been registered with TargetPro, follow the instructions in Creating Trade Areas Using a Customer Dataset on page 56. 1. Select input points. Refer to Selecting Geographies on the Map on page 50 to select the locations you want to use as the study sites. 2. Click CAPTURE TOOL in the TargetPro toolbar.

Capture Tool Button

3. Select a label field.

Capture Tool: Label and Join Field Dialog

Choose a label for the points you selected on the Analysis Map. This label field is used to provide descriptions for the trade areas that result from this capture session. Note: The join field is not relevant if you intend to create trade areas using a Market Demographic.

Click OK. 4. Choose the source of the customer data. All the information required to create the trade areas is entered in the Capture Tool dialog. The following is an example of a completed dialog which helps to illustrate how to complete all the fields:

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

60

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 4: Working with Geographies

Capture Tool: Create Trade Areas using Market Demographics

Note:

The Trade Area Creation Methodology listbox is grayed out if you are using a Market Demographic.

Select MARKET DEMOGRAPHIC to create trade areas using boundary data. 5. Select a geographic area level. Once you have selected Market Demographic, a list of standard geographies displays in the Select Geographic Area Level box. Neither imported boundary levels nor new levels created through the Capture tool are listed here. The geography you select is used as the layer to search for records to create the trade areas. Note: The Geography/Store ID field is grayed out when creating trade areas from a Market Demographic.

6. Provide a name for the trade area dataset. This name is used to identify the resulting trade areas in SQL Server and in the Geography Selector tree. By default it is the name of the geographic area level you selected. 7. Choose an Attribute. Select an attribute to use to calculate the trade areas. The drop-down list provides the variables you have used recently in TargetPro. It will be empty the first time you use this feature. Click BROWSE to launch the SELECT A VARIABLE dialog to choose an attribute. For example, if you choose 2004 Hhlds W/ Income $45,000 - 49,000, these are the records that are counted in the block group layer to create the trade areas. If you select a value such as Amount Spent, TargetPro searches for the highest values.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

61

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 4: Working with Geographies

8. Enter a threshold value. Once you have chosen an attribute, select a threshold value. This is the value you want to accumulate. In this example, if you enter 30000, the trade area that is created for each store location will contain 30,000 households with an income between $45,000 - $49,000. The threshold value you choose should be a realistic reflection of the attribute you chose. If the threshold is too large, the trade areas would also be large, making the results less meaningful for analysis. Note: The percentage option is grayed out when you are creating trade areas from Market Demographics.

9. Enter the maximum distance. This is the maximum distance TargetPro will use to calculate the trade area. For example, if you choose 10 miles, and TargetPro searches within a 10-mile radius of each store location. If you use a Total Households variable as the attribute to be summed, and TargetPro does not find the 30,000 households you specified as the threshold value, it uses the values it does have to create the trade areas. This might be significantly less than the 30,000 you originally specified. Conversely, if TargetPro has found more than 30,000 households within a 10-mile radius of the store, it uses the 30,000 households closest to the store location to create the trade area. Note: It is important to choose the maximum distance with care. TargetPro surveys the entire radius around each store location for information before collecting records. If the maximum distance is set too high, TargetPro may spend time looking for records unnecessarily.

10. Create the Trade Areas. Click FINISH. TargetPro creates and registers the trade areas and automatically displays them on the Analysis Map. These trade areas can then be used to run reports and create thematic maps. The performance of these reports is good because the data has been registered.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

62

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

Importing and Registering Data

5

One of TargetPro's key features is the ability to work with your own data. Data Manager looks after all aspects of data handling in TargetPro including importing, linking to, and registering custom datasets. When you import or link data with TargetPro, you must register it before it can be used in your analysis. You can access the Data Manager from the TargetPro menu. You can run the Data Manager at any time to work with your datasets.

In this section:

! ! ! ! Accessing the Data Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linking to a Data Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Registering Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 66 72 74

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 5: Importing and Registering Data

Accessing the Data Manager

To access the Data Manager, click DATA MANAGER from the TargetPro toolbar.

Data Manager Button

You can also select TARGETPRO > DATA MANAGER from the menu.

Data Manager Dialog

Data Manager has its own menu and toolbar providing easy access to all its main features. It lists all the custom data you have registered with TargetPro. Each dataset is displayed with its name, the geographic level(s) that it applies to, the type of data (attribute or geography), and if the data is available for public or private use. To list data registrations by data source, simply select the server from the Source drop-down list.

Data Manager: LOCALSERVER Data and Geographies

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

64

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 5: Importing and Registering Data

Data Manager Menu and Toolbar

The Data Manager menu and toolbars provide access to the Data Manager import, link, and data registration tools.

Data Manager Menu Menu Item Import Data Button Description Copies data into the TargetPro database from external files including TAB files and other data sources. Exports custom point data to a file.

Export Data

Link Server

Creates a link to an external database.

Delete Link Server

Deletes a linked server connection.

Register Data

Registers linked or imported tables with TargetPro so the system understands the contents of your data. Assigns longitude/latitude values to point data. Note: This is only available if MapMarker is licensed. Defines a block to polygon relationship for a selected registered dataset. Deletes a block centroid correspondence.

Batch Geocode

Create Block Centroid Correspondence Delete Block Centroid Correspondence Delete Data

Deletes a registered dataset from TargetPro.

Properties

Displays the dataset properties including name and vintage information.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

65

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 5: Importing and Registering Data

Menu Item Change Ownership

Button

Description Toggles the access of a dataset between public and private. So other users can be granted access to use the data. Creates different types of custom variables. This allows you to combine custom and standard data into meaningful expressions. Launches the Index Based Template Editor that allows you to override default settings. Closes the Data Manager.

Custom Variable

Template Editor

Quit

Importing Data

You can import demographic, customer, and purchase data stored in databases or spreadsheets, and spatial data such as boundary data, sales territories, store locations, and competitor information. Data you import can come from a variety of sources including tab files, and other standard data sources such as Excel, Access, SQL Server, Oracle, and FoxPro. If you have data in a database you want to link to, but do not want to import into TargetPro, you can set up a connection to access it live; refer to Linking to a Data Source on page 72. Getting your data to work in TargetPro is a two-stage process. First you import your data and then you have to register it with TargetPro. When you have imported your data, refer to Registering Data on page 74 for instructions on how to register it. You are given two options based on the type and source of data you want to import: · · Importing Data from a TAB File on page 68. Importing Data from Other Data Sources on page 69.

Preparing to Import Your Data

Before you start to import your data using the Data Manager, you should check the following information to ensure the data can be processed successfully when you reach the registration stage. Keys When choosing keys during the import process, ensure that they are valid and unique for each table. If the key is not unique, an error is generated when TargetPro starts to create indices. The keys must be a certain format depending on the type of data you are importing: · · · Point Data ­ Requires an integer key. Boundary Data ­ Requires a text key (maximum 32 characters in length). Parent Data ­ Requires a text key (maximum 32 characters in length).

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

66

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 5: Importing and Registering Data

Coordinate System If you are importing a tab file, it should be in the Longitude/Latitude (NAD 83) coordinate system. Table Naming Conventions The name of any table you are importing can be a maximum of 32 characters in length. It should not contain any spaces or special characters such as + - * / , ' ; " @ # $ ! ~ ` % & ( ) : | < > ? \. The table name may be alphanumeric, but it must start with a letter or an underscore (_). The following list of SQL Server rules apply to the structure of any table you work with:

Table Element Short string column Text, NText, or Image column Primary key column Row 8,000 2 GB 900 8,060 Maximum Size (in bytes)

Certain words cannot be used in table names. Refer to Reserved Keywords in Appendix B on page 201 for a detailed list. Field Names Field and column names in tables are limited to 32 characters. Column names greater than this are not registered. Certain words cannot be used in field names. Refer to Reserved Keywords in Appendix B on page 201 for a detailed list. Labels Fields used as labels should be text based. The label field can be left unspecified; in that case, the key field is used as the label field. The label information is used to identify the data in the Geography Selector. Normalization Normalization of keys is not supported. For example, two letter abbreviations cannot be used as keys for data mapped onto the State level, and ZIP Codes cannot contain any formatting hyphens. Hard Disk Space for Correspondence You must ensure you have enough disk space on your machine if you want to create block group correspondence when registering your data. You should check this before you start the registration procedure. You should not cancel the correspondence procedure before it has completed. Geocoded Data You need to have a license to perform geocoding in TargetPro. The data you are importing should have an IntegerKey if you want to map it in TargetPro.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

67

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 5: Importing and Registering Data

Importing Data from a TAB File

This is the first type of data import procedure you can choose from the Data Manager dialog. Choosing this option allows you to import data from a file that uses MapInfo's TAB format. 1. Click IMPORT DATA in the Data Manager toolbar.

Import Data Button

2. Choose IMPORT DATA FROM TAB file. Click NEXT. 3. Enter the location and name of the TAB file.

TargetPro Import Data Wizard: Tab File Name

Browse to the tab file you want to import, select the file and click OPEN. By default the TargetPro table name is the name of the table you are importing. Change this if you want to use a different name to refer to TargetPro's imported copy of this table. Refer to Table Naming Conventions on page 67 for more information. 4. Choose the geography type. Choose points or polygons, depending on the type of data you are importing: · · POINTS ­ If your table contains a list of locations such as stores, customer addresses, landmarks, or community centers. POLYGONS ­ If your table is made up of regions or boundaries such as sales territories, or catchment areas.

5. Click FINISH. TargetPro uses MapInfo's EasyLoader executable to copy the data from its current location into the TargetPro database. A dialog displays showing the status of the import process. EasyLoader also creates a log file, el.log, in the directory where the TAB file is located.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

68

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 5: Importing and Registering Data

6. Register your data. You need to register your data to use it in TargetPro. To start registering it right away, click REGISTER NOW. Click OK to close the dialog and register the data at another time. Refer to Registering Data on page 74 for more information.

Importing Data from Other Data Sources

This enables you to import your data from a variety of data sources such as Access, Excel or FoxPro. When importing your data from another data source, the Data Transformation Services (DTS) Import/Export Wizard sets up a connection to the data source and imports the data. For more information about DTS, refer to its online help (accessible from HELP when the application is running). DTS provides the flexibility to import data at a time convenient for you. For example, if you have a lot of large tables, you can use the SCHEDULE feature to import the tables overnight. DTS provides the opportunity to import from many different data sources, meaning there are various possible work flows. The instructions provided here work through an example using Microsoft Access as a data source. To import data from another data source using the Data Manager: 1. Click IMPORT DATA in the Data Manager toolbar.

Import Data Button

2. Choose IMPORT DATA FROM OTHER DATA SOURCE. Click NEXT. The DTS Import/Export Wizard displays. Click NEXT to the Welcome screen. 3. Choose a data source. Select a data source from the drop-down list provided. This is the type of data provider you are using, such as Microsoft Access, Excel, SQL Server, or Oracle.

DTS Wizard: Choose a Data Source

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

69

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 5: Importing and Registering Data

Note:

These screenshots illustrate the use of Microsoft Access. The screens that display in the DTS Wizard are different for different types of data sources.

Browse to the location of the file you want to import and click OPEN to display it. Provide the user name and password for this dataset, if necessary. Click NEXT. 4. Select a destination. TargetPro suggests the settings in this screen automatically.

DTS Wizard: Select Destination Location

· · ·

·

DESTINATION ­ Select MS OLE DB Provider for SQL Server SERVER ­ Select the server where you want to copy the data. By default TargetPro displays the SQL Server you are currently connected to in TargetPro. AUTHENTICATION ­ Select either Windows Authentication or SQL Server Authentication and enter a user name and password. These should be the same as your login to TargetPro. DATABASE ­ Select MIGS_USERDATA.

Click NEXT. 5. Specify Table Copy or Query. Choose to copy the tables and views from the source database. A query is advanced functionality that enables you to select a subset of the data to copy into TargetPro. Click NEXT.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

70

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 5: Importing and Registering Data

6. Select the source table and views.

DTS Wizard: Select Source Table and Views

If the database you are importing contains multiple tables, check the boxes of the tables you want to import. Optionally change the table names. TRANSFORM enables you to modify the data structure in the table you are creating. Click NEXT. 7. Save, schedule, or replicate. Choose to run the data import immediately, or schedule the package to execute at a later time. Check SAVE DTS PACKAGE to save the source, destination, and transformation properties as a package, and choose the format to save it in (optional). If you save the package, you are prompted to select a location to store it when you click NEXT. 8. Finish the DTS Import procedure. Review the DTS Import Summary information and click BACK to change any settings. Click FINISH to import the data. A status bar shows the import progress. A message box displays to notify you when the import procedure is complete. Click OK, then DONE at the Executing Package window.

DTS Import/Export Wizard: Successfully copied 1 table

9. Register your data. You need to register your data to use it in TargetPro. To start registering it right away, click REGISTER NOW. Click OK to close the dialog and register the data at another time. Refer to Registering Data on page 74 for more information.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

71

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 5: Importing and Registering Data

Linking to a Data Source

If you have data that resides on a corporate database or in a location where the data will be constantly changing and you need to set up a live access link, use a database connection. To link to a data source using a database connection, from the Data Manager: 1. Verify the Distributed Transaction Coordinator (DTC) is started for your machine. When TargetPro installs SQL Server, these services are turned ON by default. If you are using a corporate instance of SQL Server that was not installed with TargetPro, you should verify that the DTC is started. For Windows 2000 choose START > PROGRAMS > ADMINISTRATOR TOOLS > SERVICES. Double-click Distributed Transaction Coordinator (DTC) from the list of services. From the General tab check that the Service Status shows Started. If not, click SERVICE STATUS to change the Status to Started. If you intend to link to data sources frequently, it may be a good idea to select Automatic from the Startup type drop-down list. This means DTC will start automatically each time you restart your machine. 2. Click LINK DATA in the Data Manager toolbar.

Link Data Button

3. Choose a data source.

TargetPro Link Server Connection Wizard: Choose a Datasource

Select the data source from which you want to link your data; for example Oracle, SQL Server, or Jet. Enter a name by which you want TargetPro to reference the linked server. Click NEXT.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

72

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 5: Importing and Registering Data

4. Enter the name, connection string, and database catalog for the data source.

TargetPro Link Server Connection Wizard: Data Source Info

Follow the on-screen information to help you fill in these fields. The information you enter is specific to the type of database to which you are linking. Note: Ensure you enter a valid database catalog. If you do not, the server is created and registered successfully in SQL Server, but not in TargetPro which can cause problems later on.

5. Enter a username and password. If you need a username and password to access the database, enter it here. For Jet and Access databases which are not password protected, enter admin as the username. The password can be left blank. Click FINISH. 6. Click OK. 7. Register your data. You need to register your data to use it in TargetPro. Click OK to close the dialog and then proceed to register the data.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

73

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 5: Importing and Registering Data

Registering Data

After you have imported or linked your data, you must register your datasets so TargetPro can use them. For registration to be successful you need to know what type of data you are registering; TargetPro accepts five types. Go to the relevant section for instructions on how to register that type of data: · ADDITIONAL ATTRIBUTE DATA ­ This is data that can be referenced to existing registered geographies, including system geographies such as counties or custom geographies you have already imported and registered. This data may be car type and dealership information, consumer purchase information, or demographic information collected at the country level or custom sales trade area level that you have already registered with TargetPro. Refer to Registering Additional Attribute Data on page 75 for information on how to register this type of data. · AREAS BUILT FROM REGISTERED BOUNDARIES ­ This data set builds a new geographic level from parts taken from a registered geographic level. The new geography is known is the Parent Region; the parts that build it are known as the Child Regions. An example of this is a set of ZIP codes that are aggregated into a set of sales territories. The child regions being aggregated must already be registered with TargetPro. Refer to Registering Areas Built from Registered Boundaries on page 79 for information on how to register this type of data. · BOUNDARY DATA ­ This is data that is made up of areas you have created that you want to use in your TargetPro analysis. For example, areas of market coverage, mall hinterlands, and sales territories. Once a set of polygons has been imported from a TAB file it should be registered in this way. Refer to Registering Boundary Data on page 81 for information on how to register this type of data. · GEOCODED DATA ­ This is a set of points that already have longitude/latitude points associated with them. Refer to Registering Geocoded Data on page 85 for information on how to register this type of data. · NON-GEOCODED DATA ­ This is a data set of points that do not have longitude/latitude points associated with them. To make this data meaningful it needs to have some geographic reference associated with it, such as ZIP Codes or Block Groups. Refer to Registering Non Geocoded Data on page 91 for information on how to register this type of data.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

74

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 5: Importing and Registering Data

Registering Additional Attribute Data

These instructions describe registering additional attribute data such as car model information, demographic data, or sales figures. 1. Click REGISTER DATA in the Data Manager toolbar.

Register Data Button

The Data Registration Wizard displays. Note: If you clicked REGISTER NOW immediately after importing or linking to your data, this wizard launches automatically.

Data Registration Wizard: Select Input Table

Choose the type of data you want to register: · · Table from TargetPro User Database ­ Select the imported table from the drop-down list. Linked table ­ Select the server and table you want to register from the drop-down lists.

Click NEXT.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

75

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 5: Importing and Registering Data

2. Enter registration information for the additional attribute data.

Data Registration Wizard: Data Registration

Enter the following information: · · · TYPE OF DATA ­ Select ADDITIONAL ATTRIBUTE DATA. CATEGORY NAME ­ Enter a name for the dataset you are registering. The default is the name of the table. CATEGORY DESCRIPTION ­ This should be unique and less than 32 characters long. The default is the name of the table. The name and description are used to identify the variables in the Custom Linked category of the Select Variable dialog once they have been registered. · REGISTER AGAINST AN EXISTING BOUNDARY LEVEL ­ Choose an existing boundary level to geographically reference the data. For example, if your dataset contains information about sales in every county, select U.S. Counties. CREATE BLOCK CENTROID CORRESPONDENCE ­ Check the box to create correspondence (optional). If you want to query the attribute variables attached to the boundaries by ZIP, County, or any other custom polygon or sales trade area, you must have block centroid correspondence set up for the dataset. Setting up correspondence may take some processing time. · KEY COLUMN ­ Select a column in your dataset that contains the unique or primary key. This is the ID of the geography of the data you are registering against. For example if you are registering against ZIP Codes, this would be the ZIP column in your table. The example shown here is registering data against counties so it shows the county as the Key column. Click NEXT.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

·

76

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 5: Importing and Registering Data

3. Select numeric columns from your dataset that you want to use in later analyses.

Data Registration Wizard: Calculated Attribute Registration

Highlight the columns you want to summarize and click > to select them. Choose the factor you want to use as the basis for the summarization from the Aggregation Basis drop-down list. Choose from: · · · CENTROID COUNT ­ Uses the centroids (geographic centers) of the regions being aggregated to create the average. HOUSEHOLDS (BASE YEAR) ­ Uses the number of households in the regions being aggregated to create the average. POPULATION (BASE YEAR) ­ Uses the population in the regions being aggregated to create the average. COUNT ­ This represents the number of points that fall within a geographic area. For example, if you create a 5-mile ring around a store location, you can find the number of businesses within it if you use a Business variable tagged with a Count aggregation method. This should be used for point data. NONE ­ Use this option for data that will not be aggregated. For example, a cluster code column may be attached to your database, and registered as an integer column so it displays in this dialog. However it does not make sense to aggregate or average this column for your analysis. You would also not want to aggregate longitude and latitude columns. SUM ­ This represents an aggregation of the data. For example, if a sales variable in your custom database is assigned a Sum aggregation method, if you draw a 5-mile ring you can find the total sales from your store within that ring. WEIGHTED AVERAGE ­ This method is used if you want the resulting output to be an average rather than a sum total. For example, if you assign this method to a column of

Select an aggregation method for each selected column: ·

·

·

·

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

77

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 5: Importing and Registering Data

annual revenues, you could see the average annual revenue of businesses within a certain radius from a store. If you want to apply an aggregation basis to multiple columns, highlight them, then select an option from the drop-down list, and click APPLY. Click NEXT. 4. Select columns from the dataset you would like to see when you run reports using this data. You can optionally edit the descriptions that will display in the reports.

Data Registration Wizard: Display Attribute Registration

Highlight columns, then click > to select them. Click NEXT. 5. Review the options in the Confirmation Page and click BACK to revisit a dialog to change your options. 6. Click FINISH. A status bar shows the registration process. 7. Click SAVE AS FILE to save the registration summary in the Data Registration Status dialog to a text file, or click OK to close the dialog. The data is now listed in the Data Manager Registered Custom Data and Geographies window.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

78

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 5: Importing and Registering Data

Registering Areas Built from Registered Boundaries

These instructions describe registering areas that are built from geographic data that has already been registered with TargetPro. These areas might be groupings of sales territories into regional territories, or regional catchment areas of emergency service coverage. They could also be standard areas, such as ZIPs, combined into larger custom geographies. 1. Click REGISTER DATA in the Data Manager toolbar.

Register Data Button

The Data Registration Wizard displays. Note: If you clicked REGISTER NOW immediately after importing or linking to your data, this wizard launches automatically.

Data Registration Wizard: Select Input Table

Choose the type of data you want to register: · · Table from TargetPro User Database ­ Select the imported table from the drop-down list. Linked table ­ Select the server and table you want to register from the drop-down lists.

Click NEXT.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

79

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 5: Importing and Registering Data

2. Enter registration information for the areas built from registered boundaries.

Data Registration Wizard: Data Registration

Enter the following information: · · · TYPE OF DATA ­ Select AREAS BUILT FROM REGISTERED BOUNDARIES. PARENT NAME ­ Enter a name for the dataset you are registering. The default is the name of the table. PARENT DESCRIPTION ­ The Description is the name you will see when using the dataset in TargetPro. The default is the name of the table. The name and descriptions should be unique and less than 32 characters long. The name and description are used to identify the variables in the Custom Linked category of the Select Variable dialog once they have been registered. · CHILD BOUNDARY LEVEL ­ Select the Child Boundary level that indicates the registered boundaries from which the area is built. For example, if your dataset is a sales trade area made up of ZIP Codes, select U.S. ZIP Codes as the Child Boundary level. If your dataset was a grouping of custom sales territories, you would select the sales territory table that you have already registered with TargetPro as the child boundary level. · · · PARENT KEY FIELD ­ Select a column in the dataset you are registering that contains the unique ID values, or primary key, for the dataset. LABEL COLUMN ­ Select a Label column for the parent areas. CHILD KEY FIELD ­ Select a column in your dataset that contains the geography key for the child boundaries. This could be ZIPs from which sales trade areas are built, or territory IDs that make up a sales region. PERCENT ­ Select a column that represents the percent coverage field in your dataset (optional). This describes the percentage of the child that contributes to the parent. A blank entry is taken to represent 100% coverage.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

·

80

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 5: Importing and Registering Data

Click NEXT. 3. Review the information in the Confirmation Page and click BACK to revisit a dialog to change options. 4. Click FINISH. A status bar shows the registration process. 5. Click SAVE AS FILE to save the registration summary in the Data Registration Status dialog to a text file, or click OK to close the dialog. The data is now listed in the Data Manager Registered Custom Data and Geographies window.

Registering Boundary Data

These instructions describe registering boundary data such as sales territories, study areas, or market coverage areas. 1. Click REGISTER DATA in the Data Manager toolbar.

Register Data Button

The Data Registration Wizard displays. Note: If you clicked REGISTER NOW immediately after importing or linking to your data, this wizard launches automatically.

Data Registration Wizard: Select Input Table

Note:

You can only register boundary data that was imported into TargetPro from a TAB file.

TargetPro 4.7

© 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

81

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 5: Importing and Registering Data

Select the first radio button, and select the imported table. Click NEXT. 2. Enter registration information for the boundary data.

Data Registration Wizard: Data Registration

Enter the following information: · · · TYPE OF DATA ­ Select Boundary Data. BOUNDARY NAME ­ Enter a name for the dataset you are registering. The default is the name of the table. BOUNDARY DESCRIPTION ­ The default is the name of the table. The Description is the name you will see when using the dataset in TargetPro. The name and descriptions should be unique and less than 32 characters long. The name and description are used to identify the variables in the Custom Linked category of the Variable Selector dialog once they have been registered. · CREATE BLOCK CENTROID CORRESPONDENCE ­ Check the box to create correspondence (optional). Creating correspondence speeds up processing time when running a report using standard variables on the boundaries you are registering. It sets up links between the specified boundary layer and the standard block groups within it. This means TargetPro does not need to find which block groups are within the boundary each time a query is processed, because it has a set of links it can use to quickly find the information in the block groups. Creating correspondence makes subsequent queries much faster, but takes some initial processing setup time. Note: If you want to query the variables attached to the boundaries by ZIP, County, or any other polygon, you must have block centroid correspondence set up for the dataset.

·

KEY FIELD ­ Select a column in your dataset that contains the unique or primary key.

TargetPro 4.7

© 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

82

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 5: Importing and Registering Data

·

LABEL FIELD ­ Select a label field for the key (optional).

Click NEXT. 3. Select numeric columns from the dataset that you want to use in your analysis. If you want to use data in reports or thematic maps in the future, you should specify these columns now.

Data Registration Wizard: Calculated Attribute Registration

Highlight the columns you want to use in your analysis and click > to select them. Choose the factor you want to use as the basis for the summarization from the Aggregation Basis drop-down list. Choose from: · · · CENTROID COUNT ­ Uses the centroid of the regions being aggregated, such as ZIP Codes, to create the average. HOUSEHOLDS (BASE YEAR) ­ Uses the number of households in the regions being aggregated to create the average. POPULATION (BASE YEAR) ­ Uses the population in the regions being aggregated to create the average. COUNT ­ This represents the number of points that fall within a geographic area. For example, if you create a 5-mile ring around a store location, you can find the number of businesses within it if you use a Business variable tagged with a Count aggregation method. This option should only be used when registering attributes of point data, so do not select this method when registering boundary data. NONE ­ Use this option for data that will not be aggregated. For example, a cluster code column may be attached to your database, and registered as an integer column. However it does not make sense to aggregate or average this column for your analysis. You would also not want to aggregate longitude and latitude columns.

Select an aggregation method for each selected column: ·

·

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

83

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 5: Importing and Registering Data

·

·

SUM ­ This represents an aggregation of the data. For example, if a sales variable in your custom database is assigned a Sum aggregation method, if you draw a 5-mile ring you can find the total sales from your store in that ring. WEIGHTED AVERAGE ­ This method is used if you want the resulting output to be an average rather than a sum total. For example, if you assign this method to a column of annual revenues, you could see the average annual revenue of businesses within a certain radius from a store.

If you want to apply an aggregation basis to multiple columns, highlight them, then select an option from the drop-down list, and click APPLY. Click NEXT. 4. Select fields from the list of dataset columns that you would like to see when you run reports. You can optionally edit the descriptions that will display in the reports.

Data Registration Wizard: Display Attribute Registration

Highlight columns, then click > to select them. Click NEXT. 5. Review the options in the Confirmation Page and click BACK to revisit a dialog to change options. 6. Click FINISH. A status bar shows the registration process. 7. Click SAVE AS FILE to save the registration summary in the Data Registration Status dialog to a text file, or click OK to close the dialog. The data is now listed in the Data Manager Registered Custom Data and Geographies window.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

84

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 5: Importing and Registering Data

Registering Geocoded Data

These instructions describe registering Geocoded Point Data such as customer addresses, store locations, and recreation centers. 1. Click REGISTER DATA in the Data Manager toolbar.

Register Data Button

The Data Registration Wizard displays. Note: If you clicked REGISTER NOW immediately after importing or linking to your data, this wizard launches automatically.

Data Registration Wizard: Select Input Table

Choose the type of data you want to register: · · Table from TargetPro User Database ­ Select the imported table from the drop-down list. Linked table ­ Select the server and table you want to register from the drop-down lists.

Click NEXT.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

85

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 5: Importing and Registering Data

2. Enter the registration information for the geocoded point data.

Data Registration Wizard: Data Registration

Enter the following information: · · TYPE OF DATA ­ Select Geocoded Point Data. GEOCODE ­ If you want to re-geocode your points, click GEOCODE. This launches the Batch Geocode Wizard. Follow the instructions outlined in the section on Batch Geocoding from step 3 on page 100. GEOCODE is only active if MapMarker has been installed on the client machine. BOUNDARY NAME ­ Enter a name for the dataset you are registering. The default is the table name. BOUNDARY DESCRIPTION ­ This is used to identify the dataset in the Custom Linked category of the Variable Selector dialog once it has been registered. The default is the table name. The name and description should be unique and less than 32 characters long. · KEY COLUMN ­ Select an integer column in your dataset which contains the unique ID values or primary key for the dataset. This could be any field containing a different integer for every record in the table, such as a store ID or a customer number. LABEL COLUMN ­ Select a column to label the points (optional). For example, store name or manager name. LONGITUDE/LATITUDE COLUMNS ­ Select columns in the dataset that contain the Longitude and Latitude values.

· ·

· ·

Click NEXT.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

86

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 5: Importing and Registering Data

3. Select a column in the dataset to which you want to assign a boundary.

Data Registration Wizard: Boundary Assignment

Assigning a boundary code allows TargetPro to quickly associate that column with the boundary code during spatial operations, which improves performance. For example, if you have a Block Group ID column in your data, select it and move it to the right, and assign it to the U.S. Block Groups geolevel. If you do not have any boundary codes on your data, TargetPro can add them for you. Select ADD NEW ROW IN GRID and choose the geolevel(s) you want to add. Enter a name for each geolevel column. Select an existing column, or click ADD NEW ROW IN GRID to create a new column in the dataset (highlighted in blue). Select a geolevel to associate with the column from the dropdown list. Click NEXT.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

87

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 5: Importing and Registering Data

4. Select or create a column to hold a Cluster Code, if you have a registered segmentation system.

Data Registration Wizard: Cluster Assignment

Select an existing empty column or a column that contains cluster codes that need updating, or make a new column by clicking ADD NEW ROW IN GRID. Note: You can only add columns to a table you have imported into TargetPro. You cannot add columns to a linked table.

For example, if you want to associate a cluster code with each person who responded to a survey, you could find out demographic information about each person in the list. This procedure attaches a clustercode to each record in the table and creates a cluster profile of the data. This information can be used in various types of analysis throughout TargetPro. Optionally check the box to create a Neighborhood Coverage Area (NCA) as defined on page 195, and optionally edit the profile name from the default boundary name. If you select the NCA base profile checkbox, a profile of this geographic region is created and assigned as the base of the customer profile. You can also change the base demographic for the profile by selecting it and clicking SET BASE DEMOGRAPHIC. This allows you to select a different variable from the list. The Base Demographic describes what the records represent; households, population, or adults. By default households are used. Click NEXT.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

88

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 5: Importing and Registering Data

5. Select numeric columns from your dataset to register to use in your analysis.

Data Registration Wizard: Calculated Attribute Registration

Highlight the columns you want to register and click > to select them. Select an aggregation method for each selected column: · COUNT ­ This represents the number of points that fall within a geographic area. For example, if you create a 5-mile ring around a store location, you can find the number of businesses if you use a Business variable tagged with a Count aggregation method. NONE ­ Use this option for data that will not be aggregated. For example, a cluster code column may be attached to your database, and registered as an integer column however it does not make sense to aggregate or average this column. You would also not want to aggregate longitude or latitude columns. SUM ­ Use this option if you want the value in this column added for all records landing in a specified geography. For example, if a sales variable in your customer database is assigned a Sum aggregation method, when you draw a 5-mile ring you can find the total sales from all your customers in that ring. WEIGHTED AVERAGE ­ This method is used if you want the resulting output to be an average rather than a sum total. For example, if you assign this method to a column representing travel time to work, when you draw a 5-mile ring, you can find the average time to work for customers in that ring.

·

·

·

COUNT VARIABLE

A count variable is selected by default. If you remove this variable you can click ADD A to re-assign the count variable to the dataset. You may only specify one count variable per dataset. Click NEXT.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

89

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 5: Importing and Registering Data

6. Select columns from the dataset you would like to see when you run list reports using this data. You can optionally edit the descriptions that display in the reports. Usually information such as Address, Business Name, and Customer Name fall into this category.

Data Registration Wizard: Display Attribute Registration

Highlight columns, then click > to select them. Click NEXT. 7. Review the options in the Confirmation Page and click BACK to revisit a dialog to change options. 8. Click FINISH. A status bar shows the registration process. 9. Click SAVE AS FILE to save the registration summary in the Data Registration Status dialog to a text file, or click OK to close the dialog. The data is now listed in the Data Manager Registered Custom Data and Geographies window.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

90

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 5: Importing and Registering Data

Registering Non Geocoded Data

These instructions describe registering non geocoded point data such as customer addresses and store locations. Note: The dataset you are registering must have a Block Group ID or a PSYTE Code associated with it.

1. Click REGISTER DATA in the Data Manager toolbar.

Register Data Button

The Data Registration Wizard displays. Note: If you clicked REGISTER NOW immediately after importing or linking to your data, this wizard launches automatically.

Data Registration Wizard: Select Input Table

Choose the type of data you want to register: · · Table from TargetPro User Database ­ Select the imported table from the drop-down list. Linked table ­ Select the server and table you want to register from the drop-down lists.

Click NEXT.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

91

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 5: Importing and Registering Data

2. Enter the registration information for the non geocoded point data.

Data Registration Wizard: Data Registration

Enter the following information: · · TYPE OF DATA ­ Select Non Geocoded Point Data. GEOCODE ­ If you want to geocode your points, click GEOCODE. This launches the Batch Geocode Wizard. Follow the instructions outlined in the section on Batch Geocoding from step 3 on page 100. When your data has been geocoded TargetPro changes the type of data to Geocoded Point Data. GEOCODE is only active if MapMarker has been installed on the client machine. · · BOUNDARY NAME ­ Enter a name for the dataset. The default is the table name. BOUNDARY DESCRIPTION ­ Enter a description by which you want to refer to the dataset in TargetPro. The default is the table name. The name and description should be unique and less than 32 characters long. The name and description are used to identify the variables in the Custom Linked category of the Variable Selector dialog once they have been registered. · KEY COLUMN ­ Select a column which contains the unique ID values or primary key for the dataset. This could be store ID or customer number. The key values must be unique, and the key field can be either an integer or character data type. LABEL COLUMN ­ Select a column to label the points; for example, store name or customer name (optional).

·

Click NEXT.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

92

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 5: Importing and Registering Data

3. Select a column in the dataset to which you want to assign a boundary.

Data Registration Wizard: Boundary Assignment

Assigning a boundary code allows TargetPro to quickly associate that column with the boundary code during spatial operations, which improves performance. You must either geocode your data, or assign a boundary code to ensure it is geographically referenced. Select an existing column, or click ADD NEW ROW IN GRID to create a new column in the dataset (highlighted in blue). Note: You can only add columns to a table you have imported into TargetPro. You cannot add columns to a linked table.

Select a geolevel to associate with the column from the drop-down list. Click NEXT.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

93

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 5: Importing and Registering Data

4. Select or create a column to hold a cluster code, if you have a registered segmentation system.

Data Registration Wizard: Cluster Assignment

Select an existing column that is either empty or a column that contains cluster codes that need updating, or make a new column by clicking ADD NEW ROW IN GRID. If you want to associate a cluster code with each person who responded to a survey, you could find out demographic information about each person in the list. If a block group ID is associated with the dataset, optionally select the checkbox to create a Neighborhood Coverage Area (NCA) as described on page 195 and optionally edit the profile name. You can also change the base demographic for the profile by selecting it and clicking SET BASE DEMOGRAPHIC. This allows you to select a different variable from the list. Click NEXT.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

94

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 5: Importing and Registering Data

5. Select numeric columns from the list at the left that you want to use in your analysis.

Data Registration Wizard: Calculated Attribute Registration

Highlight the columns you want to register and click > to select them. Select an aggregation method for each selected column: · COUNT ­ This represents the number of points that fall within a geographic area. For example, if you create a 5-mile ring around a store location, you can find the number of businesses if you use a Business variable tagged with a Count aggregation method. NONE ­ Use this option for data that will not be aggregated. For example, a cluster code column may be attached to your database, and registered as an integer column. However it does not make sense to aggregate or average this column for your analysis. You would also not want to aggregate latitude or longitude columns. SUM ­ Use this option if you want the value in this column added for all records landing in a specified geography. For example, if a sales variable in your customer database is assigned a Sum aggregation method, when you draw a 5-mile ring you can find the total sales for all of the customers in that ring. WEIGHTED AVERAGE ­ This method is used if you want the resulting output to be an average rather than a sum total. For example, if you assign this method to a column representing travel time to work, when you draw a 5-mile ring, you can find the average time to work for customers in that ring.

·

·

·

A count variable is selected by default. If you remove this variable, you can click ADD A COUNT VARIABLE to re-assign the count variable to the dataset. You may only specify one count variable per dataset. If you want to apply an aggregation basis to multiple columns, highlight them, then select an option from the drop-down list, and click APPLY.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

95

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 5: Importing and Registering Data

Note:

Data attributes for non-geocoded point data might not be available for all levels of geography. For example, if you register data at the ZIP code level, it will not be available for block groups.

Click NEXT. 6. Select columns from the dataset you would like to see when you run list reports using this data. You can optionally edit the descriptions that will display in the reports. Usually information such as Address, Business Name, and Customer Name fall into this category. You can optionally edit the descriptions that will display in the reports.

Data Registration Wizard: Display Attribute Registration

Highlight columns, then click > to select them. Click NEXT. 7. Review the options in the Confirmation Page and click BACK to revisit a previous dialog to change options. 8. Click FINISH. A status bar shows the registration process. 9. Click SAVE AS FILE to save the registration summary in the Data Registration Status dialog to a text file, or click OK to close the dialog. The data is now listed in the Data Manager Registered Custom Data and Geographies window.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

96

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

Working with Your Data

6

In addition to importing and registering your data, you can create custom variables, geocode your data, and change dataset ownership properties using TargetPro's Data Manager. All the tasks in this section start from the Data Manager.

In this section:

! ! ! ! ! ! Exporting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Deleting a Linked Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Performing Batch Geocoding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Modifying Data Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Creating Custom Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Working with Index Based Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 6: Working with Your Data

Exporting Data

If you have a registered custom point dataset, you can export it into another format for use elsewhere. Any data that was added during the registration process, including boundary IDs, cluster codes and longitude/latitude values, are also exported. To export a registered custom point dataset, from the Data Manager: 1. Click EXPORT DATA in the Data Manager toolbar.

Export Data Button

The Export Custom Point Data dialog displays.

Export Custom Point Data Dialog

2. Select a registered custom point dataset to export. 3. Select the type of file to create when exporting the point dataset. Choose from Comma Separated Text, Microsoft Access or Excel. 4. Enter a name for the new file. By default the file name is the name of the dataset you are exporting. The filename extension matches the type of file you selected; .txt, mdb, or xls. Use BROWSE to select a location on your machine to export the file. 5. Select OPEN TABLE/FILE AFTER EXPORT (optional). This enables you to automatically access the point attribute file in the program associated with the export file format after exporting. 6. Click FINISH. The dataset is exported and saved in the location and format you selected.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

98

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 6: Working with Your Data

Deleting a Linked Server

If you no longer want to work with a server to which you had previously made a linked connection, you can delete it. Before deleting a linked server, you must delete any tables that are registered under that linked server. To delete a linked server, from the Data Manager: 1. Select the Link Server connection you want to delete from the list of Registered Custom Data and Geographies. 2. Click DELETE LINK DATA or choose TASKS > DELETE LINK SERVER from the Data Manager menu.

Delete Link Data Button

The linked server is removed from the list of Registered Custom Data and Geographies.

Performing Batch Geocoding

Batch geocoding assigns longitude and latitude values to records in a dataset so that the points can be viewed on a map and their associated attributes analyzed. The extent of geocoding you can perform depends on the number of States you have licensed. You can use the batch geocoder either to re-geocode existing records that have been updated, or to geocode new data. Note: You must have MapMarker Plus installed on your machine to use this functionality. Contact your MapInfo representative for more information.

You can perform two types of geocoding: · ZIP CENTROID ­ Records are geocoded to the ZIP Code centroid in which an address is located. MapMarker matches the ZIP Code in your input table with the ZIP Code in the geocoding engine. The longitude and latitude values of the ZIP Code centroid are then assigned to the records in your table. This is much faster than street address geocoding, but less accurate. STREET ADDRESS ­ This is more accurate than ZIP Centroid geocoding as the exact address is found in the geocoding engine and the longitude and latitude values of that point assigned to each record. The geocoding process takes longer than ZIP Centroid geocoding as it is more accurate. Note: Your table must have a primary key or column of unique IDs for geocoding to be successful.

·

1. Click BATCH GEOCODE in the Data Manager toolbar.

Batch Geocode Button

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

99

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 6: Working with Your Data

2. Select the type of connection to make to the table you want to geocode.

Batch Geocode Wizard: Select Database Connection

· ·

CONNECT TO TARGETPRO SERVER ­ Select this checkbox if the table has already been imported, or if the table currently resides on your TargetPro Server. CONNECT USING ODBC ­ Select this checkbox if the table you want to geocode is in another data source such as Access or Excel. When connecting using ODBC the Select Data Source dialog displays. Select a data source; use the ODBC help provided for further information on how to connect.

Click NEXT. 3. Select the table you want to geocode. TargetPro looks for a key column for the table, if it cannot find one you may be prompted to select it from the input table. Select the column that holds the unique ID key. Click NEXT.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

100

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 6: Working with Your Data

4. Select or create columns to store the geocoding results.

Batch Geocode Wizard: Select coordinate column(s)

· ·

CREATE NEW COLUMNS ­ Select this option if you want TargetPro to create columns to store the geocoding results, then enter names for the columns. SELECT EXISTING COLUMNS ­ Select this option if you have columns in your input table you want to use to store the geocoding results. Choose the appropriate columns from the dataset.

Click NEXT. 5. Select the columns in your input table to use to geocode the addresses.

Batch Geocode Wizard: Geocode Input Address Columns

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

101

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 6: Working with Your Data

·

·

To perform ZIP Centroid geocoding ­ Select the checkbox then specify the column(s) in the input table that contain the ZIP Code values. You must specify at least the ZIP Code field for this type of geocoding. To perform Street Address geocoding ­ Select the columns for the address columns in the input table. You must specify at least the State, City, and either the Street or Firm fields.

Check the boxes next to any fields you want to exclude from geocoding (optional). These may be fields for which you have inaccurate or incomplete information. Click FINISH. 6. Click START to begin geocoding the records in the table.

Batch Geocode (Automatic) Status Dialog

Click DONE when the process is complete. The Batch Geocode Status dialog shows the progress.

Modifying Data Properties

To delete, view properties, or modify the access rights of a dataset, right-click on one of the datasets in the Data Manager, and select an option from the pop-up menu. The access class can be public or private. Only the owner can make the data private; once it is set to private, only the owner can access it. Delete datasets using the DELETE DATA tool. Access this from TASKS > DELETE DATA or use DELETE in the Data Manager toolbar. If you choose to delete any files or tables, you are asked to confirm if you also want to delete the tables from the dataset. You can delete the data registration without removing the data from your server. This might be necessary if information was originally registered incorrectly. You can re-register the information at a later time. If you want to remove both the registration and the data from your system, accept both deletions when prompted.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

102

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 6: Working with Your Data

Creating Custom Variables

Create custom variables using the Custom Variable Editor which is accessed through CUSTOM VARIABLES in Data Manager.

Custom Variable Editor

Variable names must be less than 32 characters, and should not contain any SQL reserved keywords or special characters. Refer to Reserved Keywords in Appendix B on page 201 for detailed information. Custom Variables are stored in the Custom folders of the Category variables. By default custom variables are private. To make them public, right-click and change the access.

Creating an Expression Variable

An expression variable is created by defining a formula. A formula is a valid arithmetic expression made up of one or more variables, one or more operators, and zero or more numeric constants. The following section describes the rules for creating a formula.

Creating a Formula

You create custom variables by building a formula. Select existing variables to include in the formula from the available variables list in the Custom Variable Editor. Double-click a variable to move it to the Variable Expression box. The symbols next to the Variable Expression box insert common operators can be inserted into the formula by double-clicking. When selected, the application inserts the corresponding operator at the position of the cursor in the formula. · · +, -, *, and / operators are inserted with leading and trailing spaces. ( is inserted with a leading space.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

103

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 6: Working with Your Data

· ·

) is inserted with a trailing space. Variable names are enclosed in square brackets.

When creating a formula, the use of operators must adhere to the order of operations common to most calculations. To verify the syntax of your formula, click CHECK EXPR.

Precedence of Operators

Formulas use the order of operations common to most calculations. The following operators are listed showing the highest to the lowest precedence. The highest precedence is listed first and the lowest precedence is listed last:

Operator ( ) Parentheses Comments Expressions in parentheses are evaluated first. Where parentheses are nested, the order of operations proceeds from innermost to outermost. Brackets surround variable names. They are considered to be a "value of" operator. Operators and constants cannot appear within brackets. Brackets at this level of precedence ensure that data will be retrieved before it is operated on. Exponents that are greater than 1 are "to the power of". Exponents between 0 and 1 are "root of". Negative exponents are not supported. Decimal logarithm with a base of 10. This must be followed by a value. Multiplication and division binary operators require a value on either side. When multiple instances appear in a formula, they are evaluated from left to right. Addition and subtraction binary operators require a value on either side. When multiple instances appear in a formula, they are evaluated from left to right.

[ ] Brackets

^ Exponentiation

log *, / Multiplication and Division

+, - Addition and Subtraction

Examples of Formulas

The following are examples of valid formulas (with the assumption that the variables shown exist in the current installation):

Name Sales per Household Percent of Females in the Population Population Five-Year Percent Change [Sales]/[Households] 100*[FY Females]/[FY Population] 100*([FY Population]/[CY Population])/[CY Population] Formula

FY = Five Year CY = Current Year You may not have some of the variables given in these examples depending on the type of installation you have.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

104

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 6: Working with Your Data

Creating a True Median Variable

True median variables are used when deriving medians from ranges of summary demographic variables. To create a true median variable from the Data Manager: 1. Click CUSTOM VARIABLES to display the Custom Variable Editor.

Custom Variables Button

2. Click SPECIAL VARIABLES, then click TRUE MEDIAN VARIABLES. 3. Enter a name, description and number of decimal places for the true median variable, and click NEXT. 4. Select the demographic variables you want to use from the list and click NEXT. The range variables you select must be in the correct order, from smallest to largest. 5. Define the range categories by entering the Lower and Upper values for the range boundaries. There cannot be overlaps or gaps between ranges. 6. Click FINISH to create the ranges.

Creating a Radius Based Variable

Radius based variables return the value of an attribute within a specified radius of a given point. For example, sales within two miles of a selected point. You might create a radius based variable if you are creating a point list report. If you create a 3-mile radius based variable for population, the population of a 3-mile ring would returned for each point in the list. To create a radius based variable from within the Data Manager: 1. Click CUSTOM VARIABLES to display the Custom Variable Editor.

Custom Variables Button

2. Click SPECIAL VARIABLES, then click RADIUS BASED VARIABLE. 3. Enter a name and description for the Radius Based variable, and click NEXT. 4. Select a variable to use, and click NEXT. 5. Enter the Radius (in miles) in the text box. 6. Click FINISH to create the range. When using a radius based variable in your analysis, the input geography must be a point.

Creating a Geography Based Constant Variable

Geography Based Constant variables deliver values that always deliver the same variable for a fixed geographic selection. For example, you might want to normalize results against the population for the U.S., or you might always want to look at values in relation to California households.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

105

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 6: Working with Your Data

The geographic level and key uniquely specify the geographic area over which the value will be evaluated. This geography then becomes part of the variable definition, therefore these variables always return the same values for a specific release of data. For example, if the constant value for comparison were Adult Population for New York, the Geographic Constant Function uses this value as the comparison point for calculating percentages of other geographies. To create a geography based constant variable from the Data Manager: 1. Click CUSTOM VARIABLES to display the Custom Variable Editor.

Custom Variables Button

2. Click SPECIAL VARIABLES, then click GEOGRAPHY BASED CONSTANT. 3. Enter a name for the Geography Based Constant variable, and click NEXT. 4. Select the demographic variable you want to use from the list, and click NEXT. 5. Select the level of geography. For example, State. 6. Select the Geographic Key value. For example, 36 for New York. To find the geographic key assigned to a particular geography, choose WINDOW > NEW BROWSER from MapInfo Professional menus. Select the table for the geography from the BROWSE dialog. Click OK. The geography is displayed in a table format. The geography key is the two letter code displayed in the ST_FIPS column. 7. Click FINISH.

Creating a Geography Based Parent Variable

Geography Based Parent variables return the value of a specified attribute for the parent region of the reported geometry at a specified parent level of geometry. The parent variable provides information about geographies related to a particular selection, but not the selection itself. For example if you select ZIP code as the geographic level, and households as the demographic, when any point is entered, the Geographic Parent Variable Function finds the Zip Code that contains that point, and provides its Household count. To create a geography based parent variable from within the Data Manager: 1. Click CUSTOM VARIABLES to display the Custom Variable Editor.

Custom Variables Button

2. Click SPECIAL VARIABLES, then click GEOGRAPHY BASED PARENT. 3. Enter a name for the Geography Based Parent variable, and click NEXT. 4. Select the demographic variable you want to use, and click NEXT. 5. Select the parent boundary level, for example State, and click FINISH.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

106

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 6: Working with Your Data

Working with Index Based Templates

Using an index based template is an optional feature when running an index based report. Index based reports are discussed in detail in Make a Report Index Based on page 149. A template is used in index based reporting to provide greater control to change the default values with which the variables are compared. For example, the variable White Male Population has a default comparison variable of White Population. This comparison variable can be changed to a different value, such as Male Population, in the template editor. The index based template editor allows you to create, delete, and edit templates.

Creating an Index Based Template

To create an index based template, from the Data Manager: 1. Click TEMPLATE EDITOR in the Data Manager toolbar.

Template Editor Button

The Index Based Template Editor displays. 2. Enter a name for the new template in the Template Name text box in the bottom right-hand corner of the dialog. 3. Browse to the variables in the treeview that you want to use for the template. 4. Select a series of, or individual, variables holding down the SHIFT or CTRL keys. 5. Use the right arrow (>) button to copy the selected variables in to the new template.

Index Based Template Editor: New Template

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

107

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 6: Working with Your Data

6. Override the default base variables (optional). Highlight a variable (or variables) in the grid on the right. Browse to the variable you want to define as the new default base variable for comparison in the variable tree on the left of the editor. Highlight the new default base variable and click OVERRIDE. The new variable, that replaces the default base, is displayed in the OVERRIDE VARIABLE column for the variables you highlighted. 7. Click SAVE to save the template. 8. Click FINISH to end the Template Editor session. 9. This template is now available in the Reports and Charts dialog when making a report index based.

Reports and Charts: Index Based Templates

Editing an Index Based Template

Once a template has been created, you can edit it to add or remove variables. To edit a template: 1. Click TEMPLATE EDITOR in the Data Manager toolbar.

Template Editor Button

2. Click EDIT to display the available Index Based Templates.

Index Based Templates Dialog

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

108

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 6: Working with Your Data

3. Select the template you want to edit. Click FINISH. The editor is populated with the fields from the template. 4. Add variables to the template. Browse the treeview and select variables to add to the template. Use the SHIFT key to select a series of variables, or the CTRL key to select individual variables. Use the right arrow (>) button to copy the variables into the template 5. Remove variables from the template. Highlight a variable from the list provided. Click the left arrow button (<) to remove it. Repeat this for each variable you want to remove. 6. Click SAVE to commit the changes. If you want to edit a different template, click CLEAR. Click EDIT and select another template to edit.

Deleting an Index Based Template

To delete an index based template: 1. Click TEMPLATE EDITOR in the Data Manager toolbar.

Template Editor Button

The Index Based Template Editor displays. 2. Click EDIT to display the available Index Based Templates. 3. Select the template you want to delete. Right-click and select DELETE. 4. Delete the template. Confirm that you want to delete the template you have selected. The template is deleted.

Changing Access to a Template

All index based templates are created as private; only the person who created them can use them. If you change the access rights to Public, anyone accessing the same TargetPro server can use the template you created. To change the access rights to an index based template: 1. Click TEMPLATE EDITOR in the Data Manager toolbar.

Template Editor Button

The Index Based Template Editor displays. 2. Click EDIT to display the available Index Based Templates. 3. Select the template you want to make public or private. Right-click and select MAKE TEMPLATE PUBLIC/PRIVATE.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

109

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 6: Working with Your Data

The following icon appears next to an index based template to show it is public.

Public Index Based Template Icon

The following icon appears next to an index based template to show it is private.

Private Index Based Template Icon

4. Click FINISH.

Saving a Template with a New Name

You can make a copy of any template you have created, modify, and save it with a new name. 1. Click TEMPLATE EDITOR in the Data Manager toolbar.

Template Editor Button

The Index Based Template Editor displays. 2. Click EDIT to display the available Index Based Templates. 3. Select the template you want to save with a new name. Click FINISH. 4. Modify the template (optional). Refer to Editing an Index Based Template on page 108 for more information. 5. Click SAVE AS and enter a name for the new template.

Index Based Template Name Dialog

Click OK.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

110

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

Managing Profiles

7

The TargetPro Profile Manager allows you to create profiles and create and manage target groups. It also enables you to move or re-order profiles between groups, or sets which makes working with your profiles very straightforward. The Target Group Manager is a component of the Profile Manager, and it allows you to create new groups to use as the target areas for your analysis. They can be easily moved from one group to another as your business dynamics change over time.

In this section:

! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! Understanding Clusters and Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Filter or Weighted Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Geographic Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Product Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Customer Record Profile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Summarized Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Organizing Profiles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing Target Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 113 114 118 120 122 124 126 128

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 7: Managing Profiles

Understanding Clusters and Profiles

This section discusses the background to Clusters and Profiles, and provides examples of how they are used in TargetPro.

PSYTE Clusters

Profiles are created using the PSYTE Neighborhood Classification System. PSYTE classifies U.S. block groups into unique lifestyle segments. That is, each neighborhood in the United States is classified into a group according to that neighborhood's demographic and socio-economic makeup, and product consumption habits. The data used in creating the PSYTE clusters include current year updates to the U.S. Census (such as household income, mobility, house value, ethnicity, education, language, occupation, dwelling unit type which have all been influenced by the latest Census) as well as summarized consumer expenditure behavior created from proprietary databases. The result is a prediction database. Each of the PSYTE clusters has a number associated with it to identify it. They are ranked on a proprietary measure of discretionary income, with Cluster 1 being the wealthiest. Each cluster has been further assigned to one of 18 major groups. These major groups indicate the approximate settlement pattern of the clusters. These are: · · · · · · · High Density Urban Urban High Density Suburban Suburban Low Density Suburban Low Density Exurban Rural

Another group, Group Quarters (GQ), contains two clusters, one of which is dominated by military personnel living in barracks, the other by students in dormitories.

Profiles

Profiles, also called Cluster Profiles, are used to help you understand your customers. They segment them into key demographic groups, and correlate the similarity between your customers and other databases to help predict product usage in any geographic area. Profiles can be surveys, customer databases, or even a geographic area. For example, a company performing a mail shot could compare the cluster profile of existing customers to that of a mailing list to determine the potential number of customers in the mailing list. Another use is to compare the profiles of a customer database and a geographic area, to determine the likely prospects living in that particular area. A profile can be thought of as a collection of 72 counts. Each count represents the number of items (such as households, and population) that are included in a particular cluster.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

112

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 7: Managing Profiles

There are five (5) types of profiles that can be used in your analysis. · GEOGRAPHIC PROFILE ­ This profile is created for a standard geographic area, such as census-defined neighborhoods or ZIP Codes, or a custom geography you have created on the Analysis Map. PRODUCT PROFILE ­ This profile combines a standard or custom geographic area, with the profile of a product. This allows you to analyze a group of people in a specific geographic area that buy a certain product. For example, people who eat peanut butter in New York. CUSTOMER RECORD PROFILE ­ This profile imports a file of customer data you have collected and appends a cluster code to each record. This enables you to determine which clusters your customers come from and analyze what their typical spending patterns and lifestyle behaviors are likely to be. SUMMARIZED PROFILE ­ This is a profile that has been created in another application and has been imported into TargetPro. WEIGHTED PROFILE ­ This profile allows you to weight fields in a cluster coded custom point set you have imported. It enables you to analyze demand for a weighted field by cluster. For example, average sales by cluster.

·

·

· ·

Cluster System

A cluster system is a collection of clusters, target groups, and profiles which can be used for analysis. Although any number of cluster systems can be supported, they are assumed to be independent of each other, and have their own databases and hierarchies. Within the Profile Manager, only one cluster system can be active at a time. It is referred to as the current cluster system, and cluster and target group management operations can only be performed on the current cluster system. Before starting a session in the Profile Manager, you should choose a cluster system from the drop-down list on which you want to work.

Creating Profiles

In addition to the profiles provided with TargetPro you can also create your own profiles to use in your analysis. You can use data you have registered through the Data Manager as a profile and geographies you have created on the Analysis Map. If you create a profile using custom linked data, the profile is not dynamic, but a snapshot is created when the data is registered. To update this type of profile you can delete the registered data in Data Manager and re-register it. Any profiles you create can be used when running Segmentation Reports and charts, where you are prompted to choose a profile for your analysis. The location of the profiles you create depends on the folder you select before creating the profile. · · · If you select a private folder before creating a new profile, it is created in the folder you selected. If you select a custom profile and the parent folder is private, the new profile is created in that folder. If you select anything else, the new profile is created in the Custom folder.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

113

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 7: Managing Profiles

Profiles you create can be moved to other custom folders. Refer to Adding Profiles to a Folder on page 127 for more information.

Creating a Filter or Weighted Profile

A filtered or weighted profile is created from a point dataset you have already registered through the Data Manager. To create a filter or weighted profile: 1. Import and register any point datasets you want to import as profiles using the Data Manager. For more information see Importing and Registering Data in Chapter 5 on page 63. Note: You can only create profiles of point datasets that have cluster codes associated with them.

2. Open the Profile Manager dialog box.

Profile Manager Button

Click PROFILE MANAGER from the toolbar, or choose TARGETPRO > PROFILE MANAGER from the main menu.

Profile Manager Dialog

3. Click FILTER/WEIGHT PROFILES. The Weighted Profile Creation Wizard shows the custom point datasets that have been registered through the Data Manager.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

114

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 7: Managing Profiles

4. Select the point dataset you want to use to create a profile.

Weighted Profile Creation Wizard: Custom Point Levels

Click NEXT. 5. Create a filter expression to make a subset of the point dataset (optional).

Weighted Profile Creation Wizard: Create Filter Expression

Use operators from the drop-down lists to create a filter expression enclosed by brackets. If you include an AND/OR operator, a new row is automatically added to the expression. The expression can be up to 10 rows in length. If filtering on a string field, it must be enclosed by double quotation marks, and the % wildcard can be used anywhere within the string. If you do not want to filter the dataset, click NEXT to skip to step 8.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

115

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 7: Managing Profiles

6. Create a subset of the profile (optional). Click ATTRIBUTE SUBSETTING if you want to create a profile that contains fewer records than the full profile. Create a subset of the profile based either on a range of values (for example, sales greater than $100 and less than $150) or a distinct value (for example, a city).

Profile Manager: Profile Subsetting Dialog

Enter a name for the profile subsets and choose the type of expression. Click FINISH to return to the Filter Expression screen. 7. Click PREVIEW DATA to see the values that were selected in the filtering expression you created.

Preview Data Sample

Click NEXT.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

116

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 7: Managing Profiles

8. Select variables from the list to create weighted profiles (optional).

Weighted Profile Creation Wizard: Profile Weight Variables

The variables listed in this window are those that were specified as Calculated fields when the dataset was initially registered through the Data Manager. If no weighted variables are selected, the resulting profile provides a count of the variable. You may select more than one variable. Each variable is imported as a separate profile. Click NEXT. 9. Review the filtering and subsetting criteria you selected.

Weighted Profile Creation Wizard: Weighted Profiles Summary

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

117

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 7: Managing Profiles

10. Set a base demographic. If you want to set a demographic variable as a base for the profiles you are creating, click SET BASE DEMOGRAPHIC and browse to select a variable. Click FINISH to set the variable. 11. Select one of the following methods to create a base for the profile(s): · · NONE ­ Does not create a base for the profile(s). Use this option if you already have a base profile you have created you want to use. DEFAULT ­ TargetPro selects a suitable profile to use as a base. For example, if you are performing geography subsetting, it will choose a geographic profile; for attribute subsetting, it will choose a count profile. NEIGHBORHOOD COVERAGE AREA (NCA) ­ TargetPro creates an NCA base. This covers all the block groups that intersect the profile. UNION ­ TargetPro creates an aggregate of the profile(s) and provides a count profile as the base.

· ·

12. Select the AGGREGATE check box to create a base that encompasses all the individual profiles. 13. Click FINISH to create the profile(s).

Creating a Geographic Profile

A geographic profile is based on either a standard or custom geography. The standard geography can be selected from the Analysis Map or the Geography Selector dialog. The custom geography is an area on the Analysis Map, such as a polygon or set of rings you have created. A geographic profile enables you to choose a geography to store as a profile, that you can then use in the Reports and Charts dialog. When running a report, you could compare a study area in the analysis with this geographic profile. For example, you might create a set of rings 10 miles around a very successful store and use it to create a geographic profile. You could then use this geographic profile when running a report on other stores in your territory to see how they perform by comparison. To create a geographic profile: 1. Create any geographies you want to use as profiles. You can use both standard geographies and custom geographies to create geographic profiles. Create any custom geographies you want to use before starting to create the profiles. Custom geographies can be polygons, rings, or drive time/drive distance trade areas. Refer to Creating Custom Geographies on page 39 for more information. 2. Launch the Profile Manager. Click PROFILE MANAGER from the TargetPro toolbar, or choose TARGETPRO > PROFILE MANAGER from the main menu.

Profile Manager Button

3. Click CREATE/IMPORT PROFILES.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

118

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 7: Managing Profiles

4. Click CREATE GEOGRAPHIC PROFILES. This displays a dialog that lists the custom geographies you created to use for the geographic profile and any standard geographies you selected on the Analysis Map.

Import Geographic Profiles Dialog

5. Modify the list of geographies you want to use as geographic profiles. The custom geographies you created, and any other standard geographies you have previously selected are already listed in the dialog. Click ADD to display the Geography Selector and browse to select any additional geographies to use as geographic profiles. Refer to Selecting Geographies by Name on page 52 for more information on how to work with the Geography Selector. Select any geographies in the dialog you do not want to use as geographic profiles and click REMOVE. 6. Select a base variable for the profiles. The base variable is the unit used to count the occurrences within the profile. The default setting is households for PSYTE, but this may be different for other segmentation systems. This default is useful if you want to profile customers based on number of televisions per household, or amount of potato chips consumed per household. However, if you wanted to study how many cars were in a particular geography, you would want to change the base to something more meaningful such as adults over 18 which would allow you to show the number of cars for the adult population. If you want to change the default, click BASE VARIABLE to display the Select Base Variable dialog. Browse the demographic variables and double-click to select one, or highlight it and click OK. The variable you selected is shown at the bottom of the window. To clear the variable and return the value to the default, open the base variable dialog and click OK without selecting a variable.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

119

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 7: Managing Profiles

7. Set a base profile. A base profile provides a standard of comparison for the geographic profiles you are creating. It could be a profile of a state or a profile of a customer database. For example, if the geographic profile you are creating is within the state of New York, you might choose the New York state profile as the base. This would allow you to compare the population characteristics within the custom geography with that of the New York state. By default the base is set to the profile itself. If you want to change the default, click SET BASE PROFILE to display the Select Base Profile dialog. Browse the profiles and doubleclick one to select it, or highlight it and click OK. The variable you have selected is shown at the bottom of the window. 8. Select the SUM checkbox to create an additional Summary Profile of the selected areas (optional). 9. Click OK to import the profiles. The geographic profiles are imported and added to the Custom Profiles folder in Profile Manager.

Creating a Product Profile

A product profile shows the type of people who consume a particular product in a specified geography. A geographic profile shows the type of people in a particular area. This geography can be compared against a countrywide profile of a particular product. However, it would be more useful to study a profile of people who use a particular product in a given region. For example, rather than comparing people in New York with a countrywide profile of people who eat cheese, a product profile would show the type of people who eat cheese and live in New York. There are two ways to create a product profile: · · Creating a Product Profile from Scratch on page 120 Converting a Geographic Profile to a Product Profile on page 122

Creating a Product Profile from Scratch

1. Create any custom geographies on the Analysis Map. You can use both standard geographies and custom geographies to create geographic profiles. Create any custom geographies you want to use before starting to create the profiles. Custom geographies can be polygons, rings, or drive time/drive distance trade areas. Refer to Creating Custom Geographies on page 39 for more information. 2. Launch the Profile Manager. Click PROFILE MANAGER from the toolbar, or choose TARGETPRO > PROFILE MANAGER from the main menu.

Profile Manager Button

3. Click CREATE/IMPORT PROFILES.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

120

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 7: Managing Profiles

4. Select CREATE PRODUCT PROFILES. This dialog lists the custom geographies you created to use for the geographic profile and any standard geographies you selected on the Analysis Map.

Import Product Profiles Dialog

5. Modify the list of geographies you want to use as product profiles. The custom geographies you created, and any other standard geographies you have previously selected are already listed in the dialog. Choose ADD to display the Geography Selector and browse to select any additional geographies to use as geographic profiles. Refer to Selecting Geographies by Name on page 52 for more information on how to work with the Geography Selector. Select any geographies in the dialog you do not want to use as geographic profiles and click REMOVE. 6. Select a base variable for the profiles. The base variable is the unit used to count the occurrences within the profile. The default setting is households for PSYTE, but this may be different for other segmentation systems. This default is useful if you want to profile customers based on number of televisions per household, or amount of potato chips consumed per household. However, if you wanted to study how many cars were in a particular geography, you would want to change the base to something more meaningful, such as adults over 18, which would allow you to show the number of cars for the adult population. If you want to change the default, click BASE VARIABLE to display the Select Base Variable dialog. Browse the demographic variables and double-click one to select it, or highlight it and click OK. The variable you have selected is shown at the bottom of the window. To clear the variable and return the value to the default, open the Base variable dialog and click OK without selecting a variable.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

121

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 7: Managing Profiles

7. Set a base profile. A base profile provides a standard of comparison for the geographic profiles you are creating. It could be a profile of a state or a profile of a customer database. For example, if the geographic profile you are creating is within the state of New York, you might choose the New York state profile as the base. This would allow you to compare the population characteristics within the custom geography with that of New York state. By default, the base is set to the profile itself. If you want to change the default, click SET BASE PROFILE to display the Select Base Profile dialog. Browse the profiles and doubleclick one to select it, or highlight it and click OK. The variable you have selected is shown at the bottom of the window. 8. Select the SUM checkbox to create one summary profile of the selected areas (optional). 9. Click NEXT. Browse through the list of Available Survey Profiles and select one to use as the base for the product profile. 10. Click OK. The product profiles are imported.

Converting a Geographic Profile to a Product Profile

To create a product profile from an existing geographic profile: 1. Create a geographic profile. Refer to Creating a Geographic Profile on page 118 for information. 2. Right-click the geographic profile in the list of Custom Profiles in the Profile Manager. 3. Select CREATE PRODUCT PROFILES. Browse through the list of Available Survey Profiles and select one to use as the base for the product profile. The product profile is added to the description of the geographic profile in the list of custom profiles.

Creating a Customer Record Profile

A customer record profile is based on a file of customer data you have collected. It lets you import a file of customer information, and append a cluster code to each record. This lets you determine which clusters your customers come from and analyze what their typical spending patterns and lifestyle behaviors are likely to be. To create a customer record profile: 1. Launch the Profile Manager. Click PROFILE MANAGER from the toolbar, or choose TARGETPRO > PROFILE MANAGER from the main menu.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

122

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 7: Managing Profiles

Profile Manager Button

2. Click CREATE/IMPORT PROFILES. 3. Select IMPORT CUSTOMER RECORD PROFILES. 4. Locate a customer record file to import. Highlight the type of file that holds your customer record information. Browse to the location of the file on your system, and click OPEN. If you are importing an Access or Excel file you can choose to import a specific table or worksheet from the customer file. 5. Provide some geographic information about the file. You must specify at least one of the following columns in the customer data file you are importing to provide a geographic focus for the data: Block Group Key, Latitude/Longitude, or Segmentation System Code 6. Enter information about the customer record profile. Enter a name by which you can identify the profile, and optionally choose an alternative base demographic. If you specified a Block Group Key, you can also create an Neighbourhood Coverage Area (NCA) base profile for the dataset. This is the total area of block groups that contains all the customer records in the dataset. Optionally select the checkbox to create a weighted profile. Select the numeric field you want to weight and provide a name for the weighted profile. 7. Filter the dataset (optional). You may not want to use all the records in the customer dataset. Click FILTER to launch the Create Filter Expression dialog to filter the dataset.

Filter Button

Create Filter Expression Dialog

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

123

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 7: Managing Profiles

Use the filter expression builder to create a filter for the data. Click FINISH. 8. Register the customer record dataset for future use (optional). Select the register dataset checkbox. Enter a name for the registered dataset, and provide a label field. This is used as the label for the dataset points. If you do not register the dataset, the data is removed and only the profile remains when the profile is imported. 9. Click FINISH to import the dataset. If you chose to register the dataset, the dataset and all the associated attributes are registered at the geographic level in the Data Manager with the name you provided. To register more of the data at a later data refer to Registering Additional Attribute Data on page 75.

Creating a Summarized Profile

A summarized profile is one imported from an external source. These profiles may have been created in another source, and need to be imported into TargetPro to be used in analysis. These can be standard or weighted profiles. To create a summarized profile: 1. Launch the Profile Manager. Click PROFILE MANAGER from the toolbar, or choose TARGETPRO > PROFILE MANAGER from the main menu.

Profile Manager Button

2. Click CREATE/IMPORT PROFILES. 3. Click IMPORT SUMMARIZED PROFILES. 4. Locate a profile to import. Highlight the file type of the profile you want to import. Select the checkbox to indicate that this file has column names in the first row. Browse to the location of the file on your system, and click OPEN. If you are importing an Access or Excel file you can choose to import a specific table or worksheet from the file. 5. Choose a template for the profile (optional). Select the checkbox to browse for a template you have already set up. Browse to the template and click Open. Click LOAD TEMPLATE to populate the fields of the Import Summarized Profile dialog with the template information. If you have not already saved a template, once you have filled all the fields in the dialog, enter a unique name in the USE TEMPLATE textbox and click SAVE TEMPLATE. You can use this template to load these settings for future imports.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

124

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 7: Managing Profiles

6. Choose the type of profile you are importing. · · SINGLE PROFILE ­ One profile with information stored in columns. MULTIPLE PROFILES AS ROWS ­ More than one profile. Each profile is stored as an individual row. Select the One Profile Per Row checkbox.

The information you need to provide depends on the structure of the profile(s) you are importing. Select a profile format from the list, and specify a name. Then specify the columns from the imported profile according to the requirements for the structure of the profile as follows.

Standard Profile

· SINGLE PROFILE ­ Data contains one or two columns. The minimum requirement is a Count column in numerical Cluster order. If there are two columns, the first is the Count column and the second is the Cluster code. In this case, the Count column does not need to be in numerical cluster order. Specify the Count (and Cluster) column(s) from the profile you are importing in the drop-down lists. · MULTIPLE PROFILES AS ROWS ­ Data contains one profile per row. This format requires Count data for each profile in numerical Cluster order. Specify the fields where the Count information starts for each profile.

Standard Profile with Base

· SINGLE PROFILE ­ Data contains two or three columns. The minimum requirement is a Count column in numerical Cluster order and a column of Base Counts. If there are three columns, the additional column can be the Cluster code. In this case, the Count column does not need to be in numerical cluster order. Specify the Count, Base Count (and Cluster) columns from the profile you are importing in the drop-down list. · MULTIPLE PROFILES AS ROWS ­ Data contains one profile per row. This format requires Count data followed by the Base Count for each profile in numerical Cluster order. Specify the fields where the Count and Base Count information starts for each profile.

Volumetric Profile

· SINGLE PROFILE ­ Data contains three or four columns. The minimum requirement is a Count column in numerical Cluster order, a Base Count column, and a Volume (Weighted) column. If there are four columns, the additional column can be the Cluster code. In this case, the Count column does not need to be in numerical cluster order. Specify the Count, Base Count, Volume (and Cluster) columns from the profile you are importing in the drop-down list. · MULTIPLE PROFILES AS ROWS ­ Data contains one profile per row. This format requires Count data followed by the Base Count followed by the Volumes for each profile, all in numerical Cluster order. Specify the fields where the Count, Base Count, and Volume information starts for each profile.

MRI Profile

MRI profiles are in a specific format, with each profile presented as a row. The first 5 fields are "MR' 2 1 1 30.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

125

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 7: Managing Profiles

The next field is the description of the profile in quotes. For example "wears boots" The next 72 fields are space separated base counts (in thousands) in numerical cluster order (1-72). The next 72 fields are space separated counts (in thousands) in numerical cluster order (1-72). The next 72 fields are space separated actual counts in numerical cluster order (1-72). Each profile in a row is completed with an "enter" 7. Click FINISH to import the profile(s).

Organizing Profiles

TargetPro provides you with several profile categories, or sets, which contain individual profiles of a certain type. Generally, you are provided with survey profiles created by Mediamark Research, Inc. The profiles are listed in the treeview in Profile Manager and can be selected by expanding the folders and browsing to a specific profile.

Profile Manager Dialog

Creating a Profile Folder

To create a folder for your custom profiles: 1. Right-click in the Profiles treeview at the level you want to create the new folder. 2. Select NEW FOLDER.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

126

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 7: Managing Profiles

3. Enter a name for the new folder. Click OK. A new folder is created at the bottom of the Profiles treeview at the level you specified. By default this folder is created private, but the access privileges can be changed to public.

Changing Folder Properties

When a profile folder is created, its properties are set to private. To make it public, select the folder, right-click and select TOGGLE PRIVATE/PUBLIC. If the folder is private, it is changed to public. Public folders, and all the profiles within them, are shown by the following folder icon:

Public Custom Folder Icon

Private folders, and all the profiles within them, are shown by the following folder icon:

Private Custom Folder Icon

Note:

Only custom profiles can be modified and moved. Standard profiles can only be copied into a folder of custom profiles.

Adding Profiles to a Folder

To add profiles to a folder you have created: 1. Highlight the profile(s) you want to add to the folder, then right-click. 2. Select COPY SELECTED PROFILES. 3. Browse to the folder you created, then right-click. 4. Select PASTE SELECTED PROFILES.

Renaming Custom Profiles

To rename a folder of custom profiles or an individual profile: 1. Highlight the custom folder or profile you want to rename, then right-click. 2. Select RENAME. 3. Enter the new name for the folder or profile.

Deleting a Profile

To delete a folder of custom profiles or an individual profile: 1. Highlight the custom folder or profile you want to delete, then right-click. 2. Select DELETE. Note: Deleted profiles cannot be recovered. If you have copies of the profile you want to delete in other folders, select DELETE ALL. This deletes all instances of the profile from your system.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

127

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 7: Managing Profiles

Merging Profiles

Merging profiles allows you to combine several profiles into one. For example, you might have created a profile of your New York customers and a profile of your California customers. It might be useful to combine these two profiles to produce one profile for the whole customer set. You can merge custom and standard profiles. The merged profile is created in the Custom Profiles folder. The profiles you want to merge must not overlap. and require the same segmentation system to allow for successful demographic analysis and interpretation. The profiles may have different base profiles because the base of the merged profile is not taken from the input profiles, and the base can be chosen after the merged profile is created. Note: Only count profiles can be merged.

To merge profiles: 1. Highlight the profiles you want to merge, and right-click. Hold down the CTRL key to select individual profiles, or use the SHIFT key to select sequential profiles. 2. Select MERGE SELECTED PROFILES. 3. Provide a name for the merged profile in the Enter a Name dialog. 4. Click OK. The new merged profile is listed in the Custom Profiles folder in the treeview.

Getting Profile Information

To view information about a profile in the treeview, select the profile, right-click and select INFO. An information pop-up displays. This shows the type of profile, the PSYTE system it was created with, the demographic base, and the number of clusters in the population.

Profile Information Dialog

Managing Target Groups

Target Groups can be used to streamline and customize your marketing practices. For example, in your company, for a specific type of product it may have been shown that clusters 06, 09, 14, 23, and 18 are the clusters you specifically want to focus on for your analysis. From the information provided for those particular clusters, this collection always use your particular service whereas the remaining clusters do not. To increase revenue across all the cities in the U.S., it would be more economical to create a target group of these specific clusters and design a marketing

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

128

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 7: Managing Profiles

campaign tailored specifically to them. You can then market directly to your optimum target audience. Identify your target groups by analyzing the results of your reports. Once you have identified the clusters to put in your target group, you are ready to start work with them. After creating your target groups, you can modify them as your marketing strategies change over time. Note: You can only modify group sets you have created. The standard group sets provided with the application cannot be edited or modified.

Accessing the Target Group Manager

Target groups are managed in the Target Group Manager. To display the Target Group Manager, click CREATE/EDIT from the Profile Manager. Notice the cluster system you are currently working with is displayed in the non-editable text box at the top of the Target Group Manager.

Target Group Manager

Creating a New Group Set

Target groups are organized into Group Sets. A group set may be made up of any number of groups, but a cluster may only be assigned to one target group in any Group Set. To create a new group set: 1. Click NEW next to the GROUP SET list. 2. Provide a unique name for the group set in the Enter a Name dialog. Click OK. The new group set appears in the Group Set drop-down list. It has, by default, three empty groups numbered 001, 002, 003, colored black.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

129

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 7: Managing Profiles

Adding Groups to a Group Set

After you have created a group set, you may want to add another group of clusters. By default, group sets are created with three empty groups, but they may contain any number of groups. First choose the Group Set you want to work with from the Group Set list. Choose one of the three (3) following ways to add a group to the set: · · Use the up arrow next to the Groups In This Set box. This adds another group to the set every time you click the button. Enter a new number in the Groups In This Set box. New groups are created to make up the number of groups listed in this box. For example, if three groups exist, and 10 is entered in the text box, seven new groups are added to the existing three. · Right-click in the groups listview. Choose NEW GROUP. A new group is added to the set. New groups are numbered incrementally as they are added to the group set. For example, if three groups exist and have been renamed from the default values of 001, 002, 003, when new groups are added they still use the default numbering system and continue with 004, 005, and so on.

Renaming a Group

When you have created a new group set you can rename the groups to make them more meaningful. To rename a group, right-click on the Target Group you want to rename. Select RENAME GROUP and enter the new name.

Deleting a Group

When you choose to delete a group you are asked to verify your action. First choose the Group Set you want to work with from the Group Set drop-down list. Choose one of the three (3) following ways to delete a group from the set: · · Use the down arrow next to the Groups In This Set box. This removes the last group from the set every time you click the button. Enter a new number in the Groups In This Set box. New groups are removed from the bottom of the set to make the number of groups listed in this box. For example, if ten groups exist, and 3 is entered in the text box, seven groups are removed from the group set. · Right-click on the group you want to remove from the listview. Choose DELETE GROUP. The remaining groups are not renumbered.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

130

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 7: Managing Profiles

Changing Target Group Colors

By default the target groups are colored black. However, you may want to change the color of each group so that you can identify each group when running charts or reports based on those target groups. To change the target group color: 1. Select a Group Set from the drop-down list. 2. Highlight the group you want to change, and right-click. 3. Select CHANGE GROUP COLOR. 4. Pick a color for the group from the color picker that displays. If you are choosing a custom color, ensure that you modify the brightness in the slider bar at the far right of the dialog. 5. Click OK.

Adding Clusters to a Group

To add clusters to a group: 1. Choose the Group Set you want to use from the Group Set list. 2. Select the cluster(s) to add. There are two (2) ways to add clusters to a group. The easiest way is to drag and drop clusters into the relevant group in the set. The other option is to highlight the group to which you want to add a cluster, then select the cluster(s) you want to add to the group. Click the right-arrow button (>) to move them. To select multiple clusters either hold down the CTRL key for individual clusters, or the SHIFT key for a series of clusters. When the cluster has been used in a particular group set, it is marked as unavailable with an X. This indicates it cannot be used in any other groups in that set. 3. Click >> OTHER. After you have assigned the clusters to your group sets, click the >> OTHER button. This will assign all the unused clusters to a new group called Other. Whenever you modify the groups, click this button at the end of the session to assign the leftover clusters.

Removing Clusters from a Group

To remove clusters from a group: 1. Choose the Group Set you want to use from the Group Set drop-down list. 2. Select the cluster(s) to remove. There are two (2) ways to remove clusters from a group. The easiest way is to drag and drop clusters from the relevant group in the set back to the list of clusters. The other option is to highlight the cluster(s) you want to remove, then click the left-arrow button (<) to remove them. You can only remove individual clusters at a time in this way. To remove all the clusters from a group, select the group and use the double left arrow (<<). You can also right-click, select CLEAR GROUP, and confirm that you want to remove all the clusters from the group by clicking OK. When the cluster is removed from the group

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

131

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 7: Managing Profiles

3. Click >> OTHER. After you have assigned the clusters to your group sets, click the >> OTHER button. This will assign all the unused clusters to a new group called Other. Whenever you modify the groups, click this button at the end of the session to assign the leftover clusters.

Displaying Cluster Statistics

Statistics associated with a selected profile can be viewed in the Target Group Manager. They can be viewed individually or in comparison with the base profile. To view statistics associated with the clusters: 1. Select a profile. Click STATISTICS and select a profile for which you want to display statistics from the Select a Profile dialog. Click OK. 2. Display the statistics columns. Select a statistic from the menu that you would like to see displayed for the selected profile in the Clusters area. Click STATISTICS again to display more columns.

Target Group Manager: Display Statistics

Choose from the following statistics: · COUNT ­ The number of units within each cluster for the indicated profile. Some examples of units are demographics such as households, population, and adult population. BASE COUNT ­ The number of units within each cluster for the base profile. The base profile represents a context set of values. For example for a survey profile, the base count is the number of respondents per cluster; for a customer profile this could be the trade area. PENETRATION ­ This value shows how well the selected profile fits the base profile. It represents the percentage of the base count as shown by the count for each cluster. It is calculated as follows: [(Cluster # /Base # ) * 100]. PENETRATION INDEX ­ This represents the comparison between clusters. It is calculated as follows: [(Cluster %/Base% ) * 100]. It has an average of 100. Values

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

·

·

·

132

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 7: Managing Profiles

·

·

greater than 100 indicate an above average penetration of a cluster in comparison with other clusters. WEIGHTING/AVERAGE ­ This is the average consumption or volume associated with each cluster. Usually this represents the average dollars spent by each cluster. It is calculated as the total consumption or volume by cluster divided by the number of customers for each cluster. This statistic is only available for weighted profiles. WEIGHTED INDEX ­ This provides a comparative measure of the Weighted Average profile. It enables the spending average to be used instead of the customer count. It is calculated as follows: [(Average Weight for cluster / Total Average Weight) * 100].

Choose ALL STATISTICS or NO STATISTICS to show or clear all the columns from the display. 3. Choose a new profile (optional). To display statistics for a new profile, click STATISTICS and select NEW PROFILE. The Select a Profile dialog displays so you can choose a different profile. To clear the profile selection click OK without selecting a profile from the list.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

133

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 7: Managing Profiles

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

134

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

Running Reports

8

This chapter describes how TargetPro helps you to analyze your demographic, geographic, and business data to enable you to fully understand the relationships between them. This can help to identify your customers and markets and help you make informed business decisions about your business strategies. You can present the results of this analysis in two ways according to the presentation style most appropriate for your audience; using Reports or Charts. This chapter provides information on how to analyze your data using reports. Reports provide you with the ability to display your results as a logical ordered list of information, so you can easily find individual results and use them in further analysis.

In this section:

! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! Quick View Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Standard Demographic Reports . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Segmentation Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Running a Standard Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Custom Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing Custom Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Upgrading Custom Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Running Multiple Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 137 138 144 152 155 157 158

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 8: Running Reports

The Reporting and Charting functionality is created using the version of Crystal Reports that is installed with TargetPro. The Crystal Reports User's Guide is included online as a help file; crw.chm. It can be found in the Reports folder where you installed TargetPro Client data. Note: We strongly recommend you use the REPORTS AND CHARTS button from the TargetPro toolbar to access TargetPro's reporting functionality. Do not use the Crystal Reports functionality provided by MapInfo Professional that is accessible through TOOLS > CRYSTAL REPORTS.

You can run any of the standard reports or charts provided with TargetPro, or create your own custom reports designed specifically for your needs.

Quick View Information

Use the QUICK VIEW tool to check information on the fly about custom or standard geographies using a standard or custom report. 1. Select some areas of interest on the map. 2. Click QUICK VIEW in the TargetPro toolbar.

Quick View Button

The Quick View dialog displays.

Quick View Dialog

3. Choose a report from the list. To search for a report, expand the Report list and type the name of the report. The report that matches the text you entered is moved to the top of the list. 4. Highlight a geography to display the data for that region. A breakdown of report information for that geographic area is displayed. 5. Click the VARIABLE NAME header to sort the variables (optional).

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

136

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 8: Running Reports

Copying the Information

If you want to copy the information displayed in the Quick View dialog to the clipboard, for example to Notepad, do the following: 1. Select the variables you want to copy. To select all the variables in the list, right-click and choose SELECT ALL. Use the CTRL key to select individual variables or SHIFT to select a series of variables. 2. Right-click in the data window and select COPY. 3. Open Notepad, or any other application you want to use, and paste the information. Click CLOSE when finished.

Understanding Standard Demographic Reports

TargetPro comes with over thirty professionally pre-formatted standard report templates to use to analyze your data. Each template contains a list of variables to use with the geographic area(s) you have selected. There are two major categories of reports: DEMOGRAPHIC and SEGMENTATION Reports. Refer to Understanding Segmentation Reports on page 138 for descriptions of these types of reports, which require a special license. Demographic reports provide information about the age, sex, race and income of the geographic region you selected. There are four main types of reports: · COMPARISON ­ Compares demographic information for the geographic regions you selected. The type of information depends of the type of comparison report you run. Choose from Update Income; Retail Sales Potential; Age by Income, Sex, or Detailed Age; Five Year Ages, Income, or Race; Housing Value and MapInfo Demographic. SUMMARY ­ Provides a summary of information for each geography on one page instead of several pages. Choose from Retail Sales Potential and Financial Assets and Wealth Summary Reports. TREND ­ This shows how data changes over time for the geographic regions you selected. It also gives the percentage of change over time. For example, a geography has a total population of 127,309 in 2000 and 127,675 in 2004 which is a change of 0.29%. EXECUTIVE SUMMARY ­ Provides a top level overview of all the data in each geography.

·

·

·

The reports are organized into folders relevant to the type of reports they contain: basic, age, five year, general and income.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

137

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 8: Running Reports

Understanding Segmentation Reports

This is the category of reports used to analyze data based on geodemographic clusters. It includes PROFILE and RANKING Reports. This section provides a description of many, but not all. of the segmentation reports included with TargetPro. Note: You require a special license to access Segmentation reports.

Profile Reports

A Profile report enables you to use a profile you created in the Profile Manager to analyze your data. Profile reports are split into three categories; SINGLE PROFILE, COMPARISON and CONSUMPTION.

Single Profile Reports

This section describes three of the four single profile reports included with TargetPro. Profile Detail Report A profile detail report is the first step in analyzing and understanding your customers. Once your custom data has been imported and an appropriate base has been selected, you should select a profile detail report to start understanding the breakdown of your customers. The following are some of the questions that can be answered by using a profile detail report: · · · How many households are in the Country Manors cluster? Am I performing well in Country Manors in comparison to the other clusters? Do my customers fall into some natural segments that I can quantify and qualify for marketing use?

Profile Details with Totals A profile detail report with totals is the same as the profile detail report, except it contains two additional information columns. The first column is the percentage of customers that falls into each cluster. The second column is the percentage of the base counts that fall into each cluster. This information provides a relative perspective of the counts you have generated. For example, you know you have 120 customers in the Country Manors cluster. However, to assess if this figure is a large of small proportion of your customers it would be helpful to know that 30% of your customer base comes from the Country Manor cluster. Cumulative Detail A cumulative detail report is a type of detail report because it displays specific information about each of the clusters in your Customer Profile. This report has cumulative columns which contain running totals of both the current customer count and the base profile count. Typically, this report is run to sort clusters by the Customer Count to easily identify the clusters with the highest total, to determine where a certain percentage of customers come from. These results enable you to assign clusters to particular groups (Target Groups) based on the breaks in the percentages, for example 50%, 75% and 90%.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

138

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 8: Running Reports

The report can also be used to compare the accumulation of the percentages of customers against the base customers. For example, after sorting the list of clusters by Customer Count you may find that while 30% of customers lie in the top 5 clusters, this only represents 10% of the total base. From this it can be concluded that there is a good degree of penetration for these clusters and this type of PSYTE cluster composition would be optimal for future marketing investment. From a different perspective, efforts could be focused in the same region, but these clusters may be saturated in the current market, indicating the need to find a different set of clusters to target.

Comparison Reports

This section describes one of the two comparison reports included with TargetPro. Detailed Profile Comparison This report compares two profiles on a cluster by cluster basis to determine which clusters are related. For example, you might compare your customer profile with a Radio listening preference profile because you know there is significant correlation between your customers and this medium of marketing delivery. The next step is to identify which clusters have high indices so that the appropriate marketing message can be addressed to those radio listeners. Many analysts perform some higher level ranking analyses first, before looking at specific profiles to compare them on a cluster by cluster basis.

Ranking Reports

A ranking report enables you to rank geographies, or profiles, based on the presence or absence of target groups or other profile information. You can see the penetration of target households by a particular product, and identify the count of target households by ZIP Code.

Market Reports

This section describes three of the four market reports included with TargetPro. Market Penetration for Product This report determines which geographic markets to address from a PSYTE perspective. For example, where would be a good location for a new store or where to deliver a marketing campaign based on the type of people that live in those areas. Typically you would run many geographies against a single profile to determine the areas of interest. The report contains a Users count for each geography; this is the number of people you would expect to become customers in that geography. The Base Count is included to provide perspective. The base count is the total number of a demographic within that geographic area; this demographic is usually households, adults, or total population. The base count can also be seen as the out of value. For example, you expect to have 20 customers out of a possible 55 adults. The penetration is the division of the expected users by the Base Count, expressed as a percentage. The report also contains an Index. Unlike the Market Potential Report, this index is dependent on the geographies selected. It is a comparison of how well a particular geography was penetrated to how well the sum of the geographies was penetrated. It is computed by dividing the penetration for a single geography by the penetration for all the geographies, multiplied by 100. Because the statistic is dependent on the choice of geographies selected, different results are returned for a

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

139

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 8: Running Reports

fixed geography if other geographies are added or removed from the analysis. For example, if a single geography is selected, the index would be 100 because this geography is penetrated in exactly the same way as the whole. Market Potential for Product This report helps you rank geographies according to a profile criterion. Typically you would select many geographies to compare against a single profile. The report includes the following for each of the geographies: · · · Potential ­ The Market Potential; the number of potential users. Base Count ­ The base count is the total number of a demographic within that geographic area. This is usually households, adults, or total population. Market Potential Index (MPI) ­ A value for money statistic

The values are independent of the other geographies; if you select New York and compare it against a profile of people who eat peanut butter, you will get the same index whether you select New York or Massachusetts when you run the report. The profile you select is examined on a cluster by cluster basis, and the penetration is computed for each cluster (potential count divided by base count). These penetration rates are then applied against the count for the clusters in a geography. This value represents the number of users in that geography you would expect to behave in a particular way for that specific cluster. For instance, if 20% of customers from cluster 8 eat peanut butter, and in a particular geography there are 200 people from cluster 8, you could assume 40 people in that geography would eat peanut butter. This is done across all clusters and the results are summed to derive the Potential. The MPI is a measure of how well the clusters in the profile line up with the clusters in the geography. For example, if a profile has a very high penetration in Cluster 14, then the Potential will have a high contribution from Cluster 14 if the geography itself had a high count of people in that cluster. However, if the geography has few or no Cluster 14s represented, then the high penetration lends little to no contribution of your potential, ultimately resulting in a lower index. This is performed across all clusters, so the relative contribution of the different clusters within the profiles needs to be considered. Refer to Market Potential Index (MPI) on page 194 for information on how this value is computed. Another way to view the two values is as a raw count and a value for money statistic. The Potential would be the number of customers you would expect to obtain in the area. The MPI is a measure of how much you would need to spend in mailings to realize that number of customers. A profile can have a very low Potential but a large MPI. When looking at 2 profiles compared to the same geography, Profile 1 could have a high Potential and a low MPI, whereas Profile 2 could have a low Potential and a high MPI. The following example illustrates the situation. The two profiles are Gum chewers and Rolls Royce buyers, and the geographic area is Beverly Hills. Most people, regardless of cluster, tend to chew gum. Therefore, the selected geography is not critical, the rates will be similar across all geographies. In this case the affluence of this geographic area would suggest that less people would chew gum than average because this population engages in activities that prohibit gum chewing. Therefore although the actual count of people that chew gum would still be quite high, it would be lower than average. In other words this means a high Potential but a low MPI.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

140

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 8: Running Reports

Looking at the second profile of Rolls Royce buyers, very few people actually buy this vehicle, so regardless of the geography, the actual count of those expected to buy a Rolls Royce will be low. However, in Beverly Hills, the chances of someone buying this vehicle are much higher than the average American community. This means Rolls Royce has a low Potential but a high MPI in Beverly Hills. Therefore when reading a Market Potential Report, you should take into consideration both the Potential and the MPI. An area might show a high index for a profile, but there are only ten potential users; not enough to support the costs of a marketing campaign. Although the MPI looks good, it might actually be a geography to avoid. Market Composition This report provides some basic information about a particular geographic area. The demographics on the report include the number of adults, the total population and the number of households, all in terms of cluster. You could use this report when trying to get a feel for the current market breakdown by cluster. If you analyze it in conjunction with a customer profile, you can identify the strong and weak areas in the current customer make-up.

Product

This section describes one of the five product reports included with TargetPro. Profile Ranking by Target Group Index This report ranks a collection of profiles according to how well they index against a specified Target Group. Typically a Target Group system is defined to segment the clusters into three main groupings: Primary, Secondary and Tertiary targets. All other clusters will be designated to a group called Other. A marketing campaign might need to address each group differently because the products, services, attitudes, and means of reaching these customers will be different between the groups. This report helps design the appropriate campaign for each group. Typically you select a collection of profiles to be ranked, then a Target Group. The report displays the profile descriptions (optionally in descending order) according to the Target Group Index (TGI). Refer to Target Group Index (TGI) on page 199 for information on how this value is computed. The following example shows that the profile showing Amount spent on clothing in the past 12 months has the highest TGI of 254.82. This indicates that this target group is penetrated very well for this profile, but not so well for purchases of body powder which indexes at 84.11.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

141

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 8: Running Reports

Sample Profile Ranking by Target Group Index Report

Correlation Reports

The Spearman and Pearson Correlation Reports are used for the same purpose and produce similar results. The difference lies primarily in the calculation. For both reports you have the ability to compare one collection of profiles against another collection. By default TargetPro uses the set of geographies you initially selected as the second collection. When running this type of report, choose a Measure to use in the analysis. Choose either User Counts/Volume to record the number of entries, or Penetration to compare the percentage of people or households in a target group to the base count. Spearman Correlation Ranking For each profile in collection 1, a correlation is run independently against each profile in collection 2. The results, which lie between -1 and 1 are the coefficients and are displayed in a matrix format. The coefficient is a measure of the linear relationship between the profiles. The closer the coefficient is to 1, the stronger the positive linear relationship between the profiles. The closer the coefficient is to -1, the stronger the negative linear relationship. The closer the result is to 0, the weaker any linear relationship. In practice this means that the higher the value, the greater the similarity between profiles; where one profile has high counts, so does the other. The lower the negative value, the more the profiles are dissimilar; where one profile has high counts, the other has low counts. The closer the coefficient is to 0, the less likely there is a relationship between the two sets of profiles. This type of report is useful for scanning potential opportunities to co-brand or determine potential cross-selling opportunities. It can help answer questions such as: · · · · What profiles match closely with my customers? What types of profiles are similar so that we can package and sell them together? What attitudes are similar in people that buy a particular product? What types of advertising are best for selling particular products or services to my current customer base?

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

142

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 8: Running Reports

In general, it is suggested that Spearman calculations are used in a segmentation setting. Profiles are similar if the relative relationship between the clusters is the same and does not need to rely on actual counts. Pearson Correlation Ranking The major difference between the Spearman and Pearson coefficients is the calculation input. The Pearson calculation uses raw data, the customer counts that appear in profiles, to compute the appropriate coefficients. The Spearman calculation first ranks the cluster counts within each of the profiles. The highest count gets a ranking of 1, the second highest count a ranking of 2, and so on. These ranks are then submitted to the Pearson computation rather than the raw values. The Pearson correlation becomes useful when many of the clusters are not represented in your profile or if many values in your profile are repeated. For example, if 30 out of 60 clusters are 0, it is difficult to provide accurate results from a ranking perspective. In these circumstances, the Pearson correlation may give a better result. Product Correlation Summary This report is used to compare many profiles to a single, anchor, profile. It can be used to determine the advertising medium for a given set of customers. Running a correlation of different advertising media against a customer profile helps determine which advertising options are most aligned with your customers. Another common use is co-branding particular advertisements. If you are marketing a specific type of car you can answer the following questions: · · · What else should be included in the advertisement? How do people who buy those cars think and act? What should the setting of the advertisement be (do customers tend to enjoy the outdoors or are they city people)?

By running different correlation scenarios against that car's purchase profile, you can begin to understand how to put components together for an effective campaign. The report includes the following statistics: · r ­ The correlation for each profile against the anchor. The correlation is a Spearman Rank Order Correlation (ROC). The resultant metric of the correlation always lies between -1 and 1. The closer the correlation is to 1, the stronger the linear relationship between the two profiles. Essentially this means that the two profiles are laid out in the same way; where Profile 1 has high counts, so does Profile 2. The closer the correlation is to -1, the stronger the negative relationship of the two profiles. Where Profile 1 is strong, Profile 2 is weak. The closer the coefficient is to 0, the less likely there is a relationship between the two sets of profiles. Significance (Sig) ­ MapInfo has developed a t-test that takes into consideration the size of the cluster system used and the correlation results. The significance of the t-test is then determined and provides an indication of whether the test was significant at the 99% level or at the 95% level. Correlations that are significant at the 99% level are denoted by **, at the 95% level they are denoted by *, and under that level by N. The closer to 100% significance (or a correlation coefficient of 1 for likeness or -1 for opposites) the more compelling the significance.

·

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

143

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 8: Running Reports

Statistics are included for both the Counts and the Penetrations for the profiles. The correlation describing the Count is based on the users of a particular profile. In the case illustrated, the customer count defines the profile to which a ranking would be applied. For example, if cluster 10 had a high customer count, then cluster 10 would be given a high ranking. The same is true for all other profiles in the analysis. For the Penetration statistics, the relative values of the profiles are ranked instead of the count values. Even though Cluster 10 had a high customer count, the base count might have been very high and the resulting penetration very small. In comparison to the other penetration rates of other clusters, Cluster 10 penetration ranks low, which is the opposite of the effect illustrated using counts alone. The values you use in your analysis depends on what you want to accomplish. For example, if you are interested in advertising on the radio, you would probably be concerned about reaching large raw counts instead of direct costs. In this case you would put greater emphasis on the Count calculations. However, if you are performing a direct mail campaign, you are probably concerned about the number of items distributed due to the direct cost associated with each brochure. In that situation a penetration approach might be preferable. The key is to understanding the situation and choosing the best approach for your analysis.

Running a Standard Report

You can either run a standard report provided with TargetPro, or create a custom report. This section describes how to run a standard report. To create a custom report, refer to Creating a Custom Report on page 152. The following is the list of steps required to run a standard report (steps 4 and 5 are optional). 1. Starting the Reporting Process on page 144. 2. Selecting Geographies on page 145. 3. Selecting a Report to Run on page 146. 4. Setting Report Properties on page 147 (optional). 5. Choosing Report Options on page 148 (optional). 6. Selecting an Output Destination on page 151. 7. Running the Report on page 151.

Starting the Reporting Process

Standard reports are provided to give you a fast and easy way to generate information about your data. To run a standard report, do either of the following: · Click REPORTS in the TargetPro toolbar:

Reports Button

Choose TARGETPRO > REPORTS from the main menu.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

144

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 8: Running Reports

Selecting Geographies

The Refine Geography Selections dialog allows you to choose areas for your report.

Refine Geography Selections Dialog

The Refine Geography Selections dialog shows any regions you have already selected from the Analysis Map window or using the Geography Selector. If the list of geographies is complete for your report, click OK. If you need to modify the geographies, consider the other options in this section. Add a Geography for Your Report To add a geography to those selected in the dialog: 1. Click ADD. The Geography Selector dialog displays. 2. Use the Geography Selector to choose additional geographies for your report. Refer to Selecting Geographies by Name on page 52. Remove a Geography from Your Report To remove a geography from those selected in the dialog: 1. Select any geographies you want to remove from the list. Highlight the geographies you want to remove holding down the CTRL key for individual geographies, or the SHIFT key for a group. 2. Click REMOVE. The geographies are removed for this reporting run, but remain in the list of selected geographies for subsequent reporting runs.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

145

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 8: Running Reports

Sum the Selections As One Area You can summarize the information from a group of geographies into a single value in the report you run. This technique is commonly used to show how a single or aggregated set of geographies change over time. If you have chosen more than one geography and want to create a summary report, do the following: 1. Select the SUM checkbox. 2. Enter a heading for the summed column. The results of all the selected geographies are summed together and outputted as a single column when a report is run. When you have refined your geography selections, click OK to continue with the reporting process.

Selecting a Report to Run

Now you have selected the geographies you want to use for the reporting session, select the reports you want to run from the Reports and Charts dialog.

Reports and Charts Dialog

Expand the list of available reports and browse to the report(s) you want to run. This list depends on your TargetPro license. Select a Single Report To select a single report, double-click the report to move it to the Selected Reports list, or highlight the report and click the right-arrow button (>).

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

146

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 8: Running Reports

Select Multiple Reports To select multiple reports, hold down the CTRL key to select individual reports, or the SHIFT key to select a series of reports. Click the right-arrow button (>). Remove a Report Click the left-arrow button (<) to remove highlighted reports from the Selected list. Click the (<<) button to clear all the reports from the Selected Reports list. Search for a Report To search for a report, right-click the Available Reports list and select FIND. Enter the name, or the letters, to search for in the Find dialog.

Find Dialog

Click FIND NEXT to find the next match in the list.

Setting Report Properties

The Report Properties dialog is where you set general properties, select variables, and set sorting and filtering options for a report. Setting Report Properties is optional, apart from for certain reports which require specific types of variables. For these reports, such as Segmentation Reports, the Report Properties dialog launches automatically. Refer to Understanding Standard Demographic Reports on page 137 and Understanding Segmentation Reports on page 138 for more information about the types of reports and their requirements. To set the report properties, from the Reports and Charts dialog: 1. Highlight a report from the list of Available Reports you have just selected. You can only modify the properties of one report at a time. 2. Click REPORT PROPERTIES.

Report Properties Button

3. Enter heading information for the report in the GENERAL tab. Heading information includes the Report Title, Prepared For, and Prepared By elements of the report. This information will appear in the header section of the report when it is created. The default for the Report Title is the name of the report. Note: The Variables tab simply displays the variables used in the report. These cannot be edited for a standard report.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

147

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 8: Running Reports

4. Select variables to sort the report in the SORT BY tab.

Report Properties Dialog

Highlight a variable, or group of variables, you want to use to sort your report. Use the right-arrow button (>) to select the variable(s). The first variable in the Selected Variables list is used as the primary sort key, the second in the list as the secondary sort key, and so on. Choose to sort in ASCENDING (smallest first) or DESCENDING (largest first) order. If you choose a text variable, the results are sorted in alphabetical or reverse alphabetical order. 5. Filter the number of geographies to appear in the report. By default all the geographies are displayed. However, you can choose to display a limited number of geographies at the top or bottom of the report. 6. Click OK to save the report properties. When you have modified a report's properties, the new settings are applicable to that report only.

Choosing Report Options

You can specify to make a report Index Based or base them on a specific Target Group. Once the report options are selected, new screens are displayed in the Report Properties dialog with these settings. However, the report options only persist while the check boxes are selected. The report options are lost when the checkboxes are cleared, unless the report is saved as a custom report after the report is generated.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

148

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 8: Running Reports

Make a Report Index Based An index base is a geographic area that you can use to compare against other geographic regions. For example, you may know that New York can be expected to deliver $500 million in revenue for a particular product. However, this result does not show if the result is good or not for that state. Index based reporting enables you to compare your results against another region to see if your geography meets a standard you know to be acceptable. For example, you could compare the results from New York with those of Florida, which you know to be performing well. An index allows you to compare other geographic areas against the base. A measure of 100 is assigned for each numerical value in the index base. A value of 100 indicates that the study area is about the same as the base geography. A value lower than 100 shows the study area has fewer counts than the base. A value higher than 100 shows the study area has more counts than the base geography. For example if the base geography has a male population of 45%, this is assigned as the average value, and given a score of 100. If the study area shows an index of 98, this means that the study geography is below the value of the base geography. If the study area has an index of 110, the male population in the study area is 10% higher than that of the base geography. To make a report you have selected Index Based: 1. Select the INDEX BASED REPORT checkbox. The Report Properties dialog for with options for Index Reports displays:

Report Properties: Index

2. Select a base geography. This is the geography against which you want to compare your geographic selections. Choose from the following options: · · GEOGRAPHIC SUM ­ All the geographies you selected are summed into one region. INDIVIDUAL GEOGRAPHY ­ One of the geographies you selected for your analysis.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

149

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 8: Running Reports

·

BROWSE FOR A GEOGRAPHY ­ Browse to select another geography, for example USA, to compare your study areas against.

3. Select the results you want to see in your report. Choose the types of information you want to see in the final report. The following list provides an explanation of what each result means: · · COUNT ­ This is the number of occurrences for each variable in the report for the geography. PERCENT ­ The percentage of a variable against the total for that geography. For example, the 2000 male population is 48.20% of the 2000 Total Population for New York. INDEX ­ The index is the comparison between the study geography and the base geography. It is based on a value of 100 and shows how well the study area fits with the base geography. A value of 100 shows both the geographies have the same percentage of the total for a particular variable. For example, 2000 Male Population shows an index of 98.25 between New York and the USA as the base. The 2000 male population for New York is 48.2% of the New York total count, and the 2000 male population for the whole of the USA is 49.1% of the USA total count. The index value of 98.25 means that New York has slightly less than the USA percentage of 2000 males. If the percentage for New York were 49.1%, the index would be 100. 4. Select a template to use for the index report. If you have created an index based template to use in your analysis in Creating an Index Based Template on page 107 select the USE TEMPLATE checkbox and select the template you want to use. 5. Click OK. Make a Report for a Target Group A report based on a specific target group allows you to run a report, but only show results for a target group you are specifically interested in. To create a Report for Target Group: 1. Select the REPORT FOR TARGET GROUP checkbox. The Target Group dialog with options for Target Groups automatically displays:

·

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

150

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 8: Running Reports

Report Properties: Target Groups

2. Select a segmentation system, target group, and target from the lists. 3. Click OK.

Selecting an Output Destination

There are several output destinations available in the Select Report to Run dialog. You can specify any of the following options for the report output: · REPORT TO SCREEN ­ Displays the results in a Crystal Reports window. From here you can print or export the report. A report can be exported to different formats, including Microsoft Word and pdf. REPORT TO PRINTER ­ Displays the Print dialog where you can set standard print options before printing the report. Make sure that you have set up your printer connection prior to selecting this option. REPORT TO TAB FILE (single report) ­ Saves a single report in MapInfo tab file format. Highlight a report you want to save as a tab file. Click OK to display the Save As dialog where you can browse to a location on your machine. Enter a name for the tab file. Click SAVE. Geographies are stored as rows. There is a limit of 250 columns on TAB files REPORT TO FILE ­ Allows you to save the reports as Microsoft Access, Excel or Comma Delimited Text files. Enter the required information based on the type of file you select. Enter a name for the file and click RUN.

·

·

·

Running the Report

Click OK to run the report. The report runs and the output is presented, or stored in the format you selected in the output options.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

151

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 8: Running Reports

Creating a Custom Report

Create a custom report to make a new report that is based on your specific reporting requirements. Note: Refer to Creating Folders for Custom Reports on page 155 before creating any custom reports.

You can create two types of custom reports using TargetPro: a DETAIL LIST report that has variables as rows and geographies as columns or a GEOLIST report that has variables as columns and geographies as rows. To create a new custom report from the Reports and Charts dialog: 1. Click CREATE. The Create Custom Report dialog displays.

Create Custom Report Dialog

2. Enter header and style information in the HEADER AND STYLE tab. Enter the name of the report, which will also be used as the report title, and fill in the PREPARED FOR and PREPARED BY text boxes. Select a report style from the drop-down list. A Detail Report shows variables as rows, and geographies as columns. A Geolist Report shows geographies as rows, and variables as columns. By default, only three variables are displayed on each page of a geolist report. Refer to Redesigning the Report Layout on page 153 for information on how to modify the look and feel of a report. 3. Select variables for the report in the Variables tab. Variables are divided into Category variables and Report variables. · · CATEGORY VARIABLES ­ These are organized into logical folders. REPORT VARIABLES ­ These are lists of each report in the system. Each report includes a list of the variables in that report.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

152

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 8: Running Reports

To include a variable in the custom report, select it from the Available Variables list and click the right-arrow button (>) to move it to the Selected Variables list. To remove a variable from the Selected Variables list, select it and use the left-arrow button (<). 4. Add a category (optional). Variables you have selected can be grouped into categories. To place a variable into a category, right-click it (in the Selected Variables list) and select ADD CATEGORY.

Add Category Dialog

Enter the category name in the dialog provided, and click OK. The category name displays in the list with a red arrow. When the report is run, all the variables that appear underneath a category are indented. To re-order the variables in the list, use the up and down arrow buttons. This changes the order of the variables in the report when it is run. To delete a category, highlight the Category and click the left arrow (<). When a category is removed, all the variables belonging to that category are merged into the category above. 5. Click OK when you have finished making your selections. The new report displays in the Selected Reports and the Custom folder in the Available Reports list in the Reports and Charts dialog. 6. Set Report Properties and Options. Refer to Setting Report Properties on page 147 and Choosing Report Options on page 148 for more information. Note: Sorting options set for a custom report override the settings made in the Sort By tab.

7. Select an Output Destination. Refer to Selecting an Output Destination on page 151 for more information. Note: Ensure that you use the Report to Screen option if you have created categories, otherwise the categories are lost.

8. Run the report The new custom report is added to the bottom of the list of Available custom reports. Refer to Managing Custom Reports on page 155 for information on how to organize the custom reports.

Redesigning the Report Layout

The EDIT button in the Reports and Charts dialog enables power users to adjust the layout of a report. Reports are designed in Crystal Reports and the Crystal Reports User Guide is included online. You can add graphs and charting to provide the finishing touches to your report.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

153

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 8: Running Reports

Note:

You can only edit reports that you have designed.

Care must be taken when editing a report layout. Data for the report is displayed in fields which TargetPro reads to generate a report. If the contents of the fields are changed, errors could be introduced into the report. To open a report in design mode from the Reports and Charts dialog: 1. Highlight a report to edit from the Select Reports list. Highlight a report in the Available Reports list and click the right arrow button (>) to move it to the Selected Reports list. Alternatively, double-click the report to select it. 2. Click EDIT to view the report. 3. Click DESIGN REPORT.

Design Report Button

For information on how to use the program's full complement of features, refer to the Crystal Reports help system that can be accessed directly at HELP > CRYSTAL REPORTS HELP.

Using Cross-Tabs

Cross-tabs summarize and present data in a compact row and column format that makes it easy to compare data and identify trends. Cross tabs are used in detail and geolist reports in the following way. Detail Reports Cross-tabs in Detail reports are used to show the data (variables) as rows. The structure of the page is defined by several formulas: · · · GROUPFACTOR ­ Groups the report to make it span multiple pages. GEOSPERPAGES ­ Defines the number of geographies to be shown per page. (This formula is also used in the GroupFactor formula). SPACE ­ Adds empty space into the cross-tab. It should be added as a summarized field into the cross-tab. Its summary type should be changed to 'MAX'.

Geolist Reports Cross-tabs in Geolist reports allow the report to span multiple pages if all the requested information does not fit onto one page. Each cross-tab shows the information for one variable, apart from the first cross-tab in each section which shows the geography label. By default the report shows 3 variables per page. Var_Col... formulas in Geolist reports contain the variable names and are used as column headers in the cross-tabs.

ReportName Formula

This formula is used to pass the report name at runtime and to show it in the report heading.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

154

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 8: Running Reports

PreparedFor and PreparedBy Formulas

These formulas pass the 'Prepared For' and 'Prepared By' strings defined in the Report Properties dialogs and show them in the report heading.

Toggling Between the Preview and Design Screens

You can switch between the Preview and Design screens by clicking on the appropriate menu items or buttons. The changes made on the Design screen are reflected when you switch to the Preview screen.

Saving a Report

There are several ways to save a custom report: · To save a report you have modified choose FILE > SAVE from the main menu, or click SAVE. The report template is saved in the TargetPro metadata. · · To save the report as another custom report choose FILE > SAVE AS from the main menu. To save the report as a .rpt file click the diskette button in the menu bar in the design mode.

Save as Crystal Reports File Button

Note:

If you do not save the report before closing, all the changes are lost.

Managing Custom Reports

This section describes how to delete a report, organize reports into categories, remove categories, and change the custom report's properties.

Creating Folders for Custom Reports

Custom reports can be organized into folders in the Available Reports list of the Reports and Charts dialog. To create a folder for the custom reports, from the Reports and Charts dialog: 1. Select the Custom Reports folder, or a sub-folder, in the Available Reports list. 2. Right-click the folder you selected. 3. Select INSERT FOLDER. Enter the name for the folder in the Add Category dialog. The new folder is added to the end of the Custom Reports list. To add custom reports to the folder you have created, highlight the folder before creating your custom report. The newly created custom report is added to the selected folder.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

155

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 8: Running Reports

Changing Custom Report Access Rights

Custom reports and folders can either be Public or Private. When a custom report or folder is created it is private, but it can be made public if required.

Understanding Private Privileges

These custom reports and folders can only be seen by the user who created them. Other users accessing the same TargetPro Server do not see these reports or folders in the treeview. Only the user who creates these reports and folders can edit, delete, copy, or paste them. The following icon appears next to a custom report to show it is private.

Private Custom Report Icon

The following icon appears next to a custom folder to show it is private.

Private Custom Folder Icon

Understanding Public Privileges

Public custom reports and folders were created Private, but have been made Public by the user who created them. Any user connected to the same TargetPro Server can see these reports and folders and edit, delete, copy or paste them. The following icon appears next to a custom report to show it is public.

Public Custom Report Icon

The following icon appears next to a custom folder to show it is public.

Public Custom Folder Icon

Change a Report's Privileges

To change a report's access privileges in the Reports and Charts dialog: 1. Right-click the custom report in the list of Available Reports. 2. Select MAKE REPORT PUBLIC/PRIVATE. The custom report's icon changes to show it is public or private.

Change a Folder's Privileges

To change a folder's access privileges in the Reports and Charts dialog: 1. Right-click the custom folder in the list of Available Reports. 2. Select MAKE FOLDER PUBLIC/PRIVATE. The custom folder's icon changes to show it is public or private.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

156

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 8: Running Reports

Deleting a Custom Report or Folder

Public custom reports and folders, and those you have created, can be deleted from TargetPro. Note: If you delete a public report or folder, it is no longer available to other users.

To delete a custom report or folder from the Reports and Charts dialog: 1. Right-click the custom report or folder in the list of Available Reports. 2. Select DELETE. The report or folder is deleted and removed from the treeview.

Moving Custom Reports

Once created, custom reports can be moved by copying the report, pasting it to a new location and deleting the old copy. To move a report: 1. Select the custom report you want to move. 2. Right-click the custom report in the list of Available Reports. 3. Select COPY. 4. Choose a destination for the copied report, and select the top level folder where you want to move the report. 5. Right-click the folder and select PASTE. The report is copied to the new location. 6. Delete the old report.

Upgrading Custom Reports

If you are upgrading from TargetPro 4.6 with 2003 data to TargetPro 4.7, you will need to upgrade your custom reports. When you first use the Reports and Charts dialog in TargetPro 4.7 your custom reports need to be upgraded to use with 2004 data. For example if you have a report that has a description of 2003 Total Population, and you have 2004 data, this utility updates the description to 2004 Total Population. A message displays asking if you want to upgrade your custom reports now.

Upgrade Custom Reports Dialog

To upgrade now, click YES. Click NO to update the reports at later time. TargetPro searches for all the custom reports that need updating for the 2004 data and presents a list of all the reports found. The reports that need upgrading appear checked.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

157

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 8: Running Reports

If you do not want to upgrade some of the reports shown in the list, clear the checkboxes next to those reports.

Upgrade Reports: Check Reports to Upgrade

Click OK to upgrade the reports you selected.

Upgrading Later

If you decide to upgrade your reports later simply right-click in the Custom Reports folder of the Reports and Charts dialog and choose UPGRADE REPORTS. This launches the report upgrade application described in the previous section. The Upgrade Reports dialog appears every time you run reports until you agree to upgrade.

Running Multiple Reports

You can run multiple reports at the same time. In the Reports and Charts dialog, simply select all the reports you want to run and move them to the Selected Reports list, then click OK. Note: You can only change the properties for one report at a time. The Properties button is only active if you highlight a single report in the Selected Reports list.

If you choose to output to the screen, or printer, all the reports in the Selected Reports window are run at once.

Ordering How Reports Are Printed

The order reports are printed in is determined by the order the reports are listed in the Reports and Charts dialog. To change the order, use the move up and move down arrow buttons to move a highlighted report up or down in the Selected Reports list.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

158

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

Running Charts

9

160 162 163 167 175

This chapter discusses how to analyze your data visually using charts. Charts enable you to produce graphical representation of the results of your analysis. This is useful to provide a visual representation of the data distribution, so you can use it for meaningful analysis. They may also be used to add visual impact to a presentation you are preparing.

In this section:

! ! ! ! ! Choosing a Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Running a Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analyzing Bar Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analyzing Battlegrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analyzing Gains and Lift Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 9: Running Charts

Charts provide a graphic representation of analysis results. Unlike a report where information is provided as a list, charts show information visually. This allows you to analyze your results in a different way, showing trends and significances in the data set which may not be so obvious when looking through the information as a list. Note: Charting functionality is only available for users who are licensed for segmentation. If you are not licensed for segmentation reporting, charts can be created inside your reports using the Crystal Reports designer.

Choosing a Chart

TargetPro provides three (3) different types of charts. They are all used to give a graphic display of the results of your analysis. Refer to Understanding Clusters and Profiles on page 112 for more information on the concepts and details of profiles and clusters.

Bar Charts

Bar charts are based on profiles. They give a visual representation of a profile composition within a a geographic area you have selected. Refer to Creating Profiles on page 113 for more information. Select one of the following types of profiles. · · · · GEOGRAPHIC ­ Compares the study area against another geographic region. PRODUCT ­ Compares the study area with a product analysis in another geographic region. CUSTOMER RECORD ­ Compares the data in the geographic study area with data from a file of customer data you have imported. SUMMARIZED ­ Compares the data in the geographic study area with a profile you have imported from another source.

A bar chart shows a horizontal bar for each of the PSYTE clusters. These bars are shown on a vertical line that represents an index of 100. The index illustrates how well each of the PSYTE clusters in a study area are penetrated in comparison with the other clusters in the profile. TargetPro provides two types of bar charts: · · SINGLE PROFILE BAR CHART ­ Compares one profile with the study area. SINGLE PROFILE FEVER LINE CHART ­ Compares two profiles. The second profile is shown as a line running through the bar chart. This bar chart can be used to compare two brands or products for a specific geography, or to show the difference between customers and expenditures.

For descriptions of how to interpret these charts, refer to Analyzing Bar Charts on page 163.

Battlegrams

A battlegram is a graphical analysis technique represented as a Quadrant Analysis chart. It is used to display different information depending on the scenario. You can analyze your data and draw conclusions based on where the results fall in the quadrant.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

160

TargteProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 9: Running Charts

· ·

TWO PROFILE CLUSTER INDEX CHART ­ Displays the indexes of two profiles. Each cluster is plotted on the chart according to the intersection of the index values of each profile. GAME PLAN CHART ­ Displays the index of a single profile. This chart reveals which clusters outperform others and gives information on which clusters have high or low potential for a product. CONSUMPTION TO POTENTIAL INDEX CHART ­ Compares the potential index with the consumption index of a single weighted profile. This chart compares how much product each cluster consumes with how many households are in each cluster. GEOGRAPHY TARGET BATTLEGRAM CHART ­ Compares a selection of geographies and a weighted profile. The results show the Market Potential of the profile with the Consumption Potential Index. The resulting battlegram shows a series of circles with different sizes and colors to reflect the consumption value.

·

·

For descriptions of how to interpret these charts, refer to Analyzing Battlegrams on page 167.

Gains and Lift Charts

Gains and lift charts take the form of graphs with two dimensional axes. They provide a way of analyzing the difference between a random distribution of customers (evenly spread among clusters) and the cluster values in the actual profile. · GAINS CHART ­ Graphically displays the actual accumulated cluster values in a profile in comparison to a theoretical random (linear) distribution. This gives a Point of Diminishing Returns for that profile. LIFT CHART ­ Displays the difference between the linear and gains charts.

·

For descriptions of how to interpret these charts, refer to Analyzing Gains and Lift Charts on page 175.

Chart Requirements

Different charts require different inputs. The following table provides a checklist showing the various requirements for each type of chart.

Chart Single Profile Bar Chart Single Profile Fever Line Two Profile Cluster Index Game Plan Consumption to Potential Index Geography Target Battlegram Gains Chart Lift Chart Number of Profiles 1 2 2 1 1 (weighted) 1 (weighted) 1 1 Geographies? No No No No No Yes No No Target Group? Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

161

TargteProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 9: Running Charts

Running a Chart

Once you have decided which type of chart you need for your analysis, you are ready to run the chart. To run a chart: 1. Click REPORTS in the TargetPro toolbar:

Reports Button

The Refine Geography Selections dialog displays with your selections listed. 2. Select areas for your report (if necessary). Select geographies appropriate for the type of chart you want to create. Refer to Selecting Geographies on page 145 for more information. Click OK in the Refine Area Selections dialog to continue. The Reports and Charts dialog displays. 3. Display the Charts view. Click the CHARTS tab to display the TargetPro charts.

Reports and Charts Dialog: Charts View

4. Select a chart. Highlight the chart you want to run and click the right arrow (>) button. The Report Properties dialog displays automatically with the Profiles tab selected. 5. Select the cluster system for the chart. Choose the cluster and target group system to use from the lists provided. 6. Select the profile(s) for the chart. Depending on the chart you select, you need to select one or two profiles. Refer to Choosing a Chart on page 160 for more information about each chart.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

162

TargteProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 9: Running Charts

Browse to the profile you want to analyze on the chart. Highlight it, and click the right arrow (>) to select it for the chart. Repeat if you require more than one profile. Click OK. The Report Properties dialog closes and returns you to the Reports and Charts dialog. 7. Run the chart. Click OK. The chart is created and displayed. Note: All the charts in the Selected Charts list are run when you click OK.

8. Analyze the results of the chart. Refer to the relevant section for help on how to read the chart you have created: · · · Analyzing Bar Charts on page 163 Analyzing Battlegrams on page 167 Analyzing Gains and Lift Charts on page 175

Analyzing Bar Charts

This section helps you analyze the bar charts you have created in TargetPro.

Understanding the Bar Chart

The two types of bar charts offered in TargetPro represent profiles. These charts have a set of bars; each bar represents the cluster index for each of the 72 clusters in a profile. The bars run from cluster 01 at the top to cluster 72 at the bottom. A bar chart shows how well each cluster is penetrated in comparison with the other clusters in the profile within the geographic area you have chosen.

Cluster Penetration

The vertical line in the center of the chart represents an index of 100. This can be thought of as the average cluster penetration for the area. Any bars to the left of the line have a lower penetration than average (they under-index), and those to the right of the line have a higher penetration than average (they over-index). The actual number for each bar comes from the cluster index score. This score is the ratio of a cluster's penetration to the penetration of the entire profile. Refer to Cluster Index Score on page 190 for more detailed information on how the cluster index score is calculated. The penetration of a cluster is defined by the count of the profile per cluster divided by the count of the associated base profile for that cluster. Refer to Creating Profiles on page 113 for more information on how to set a base when creating a profile.

Degree of Penetration

The length of the bar measures the degree of deviation from 100. The longer the line is, the larger the degree of under or over-indexing. Notice that the scales are different on each side of the 100 line. This allows a visual representation of each cluster's index score to be shown realistically. For

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

163

TargteProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 9: Running Charts

example, a cluster with an index of 200 has twice the average penetration. Likewise a cluster with an index of 50 has half the average penetration. Both these scores are placed the same distance from 100 to show their relative scores. If the cluster bar touches the left edge of the chart it shows it is not represented in the sample and has a size of zero.

Cluster Count

In addition to the cluster index score it is important to analyze the count of each cluster in the profile. The count for each cluster is shown as a small bar chart on the left of the chart. It gives information about how well a cluster is represented in the sample. For example, although one cluster has a very high index, the count may be low, showing that this cluster is not well represented in the study area.

Bar Color

Each of the clusters is assigned a color according to its target group. You can run the bar chart using one of the standard target systems; PSYTE Advantage Major Groups or PSYTE Advantage Settlement Types. This displays each cluster with a custom color. Alternatively you can choose a custom target group system you have created. Refer to Managing Target Groups on page 128 for a description of target groups.

Single Profile Bar Chart

A single profile bar chart displays the results of one profile for a particular geographic area. Refer to Understanding the Bar Chart on page 163 for information on how to interpret the bar chart. This section provides an example of a single profile bar chart and how to read it. In the following example, the chart shows a profile for households that have bought any household appliances in the past 12 months in New York State. This chart uses the PSYTE Advantage Major Groups as the Target Groups System.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

164

TargteProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 9: Running Charts

Sample Single Profile Bar Chart

When analyzing the chart, PSYTE Cluster 41: Old Metro, New Hands shows a long line to the left of 100 with an index of 49.14. This shows that this cluster has less than half the average penetration for household appliances in New York. This is less than the average for household appliances in New York, so Cluster 41 households should not be targeted for household appliance sales. However, only 144,326 of 1162198 households (12.4%) were represented in the sample, so this information might not be representative of that particular cluster. Conversely Cluster 52: Military Towns, shows an index of 167.25. This means that this cluster is well over the average of households who bought household appliances in the past 12 months. This may be a cluster that would be more likely to buy household appliances. Refer to Viewing Cluster Information on page 177 for information on how to quickly access cluster descriptions.

Single Profile Fever Line Chart

A single profile fever line chart displays the results of two profiles. You need to choose two profiles; the first profile is represented as a bar chart, the second as a line (fever line). Refer to Understanding the Bar Chart on page 163 for information on how to interpret the bar chart. This section provides an example of a single profile fever line chart and how to read it.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

165

TargteProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 9: Running Charts

Both the profiles you choose have their cluster indices mapped on the chart. The bar chart should be read in the same way as a single bar chart. The fever line is simply a different way of representing the profile information. Rather than showing a second set of bars, the points are shown as stars which are connected. The single profile fever line chart shows where two profiles are similar, and where they are different. These differences and similarities might require different marketing actions. For example you might select Profile 1 as your customer list, and Profile 2 as the likelihood of customers within a geographic area to buy a sports car. You would look for those clusters that have a long bar to the right, matched by the fever line. This would show that there are more than average of that cluster on your customer list, and that cluster is more likely than others to buy a sports car. You could then target that cluster in a marketing campaign. If you see that a particular cluster under-indexes for Profile 1, but over-indexes for Profile 2, you could investigate why there are not more customers from this cluster in your customer list as these would be people who would be more likely to buy a sports car. In the following example the first profile, represented by bars, shows the number of households who buy cream cheese. The second profile, represented by the fever line, shows the number of households who buy pretzels.

Sample Single Profile Fever Line Chart

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

166

TargteProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 9: Running Charts

When the fever line closely follows the bar line the results of the two profiles fit closely together. Areas of interest are often those where there is a gap in the chart because it shows that you perform well for one product for a particular cluster, but not for a different product. In this example Cluster 15: Western Sprawl over-indexes for cream cheese, but under-indexes for pretzels. Why would those clusters buy cream cheese but not pretzels? Cluster 65 under-indexes in both cream cheese and pretzels, showing that households in this cluster are not likely to buy either of these products. Refer to Viewing Cluster Information on page 177 for information on how to quickly access cluster descriptions.

Analyzing Battlegrams

Battlegrams provide a graphical analysis technique that can be used to quickly draw conclusions from profiles. The results are displayed in quadrants with a different type of analysis performed for each type of battlegram.

Two Profile Cluster Index Chart

The Two Profile Cluster Index chart displays the cluster index of two profiles. It allows you to see which clusters fall into particular categories and interpret results based on where they fall. As with a bar chart, the quadrants are divided by a 100 index centerline. The first profile selected is plotted on the x-axis, and the second profile is plotted on the y-axis. The grid is centered at (100, 100). Each cluster is plotted according to the intersection of the two cluster index values. The farther the point lies from the line, the greater the degree of deviation from 100 and the larger the degree of under or over-indexing. The scales are different on each side of the 100 line to allow each pair of index scores to be represented realistically. For example, a cluster with an index of 200 has twice the average penetration. Likewise a cluster with an index of 50 has half the average penetration. Both these scores are placed the same distance from 100 to show their relative scores. The most common use for this type of chart is to see how well your customer profile fits with a survey profile for your product. This shows how well your customers match a typical profile for a product. Note: This is only one of the many types of interpretation for this chart.

The following table gives interpretations where Profile 1 is a customer profile, and Profile 2 is a survey profile:

Profile 1 Dominate Cluster Index > 100 Profile 2 Cluster Index > 100 Result These clusters are more than likely to buy your product than average, and they are well represented in your customer profile.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

167

TargteProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 9: Running Charts

Profile 1 Invest Cluster Index < 100

Profile 2 Cluster Index > 100

Result These clusters are more than likely to buy your product than average, but there are few of them in your customer profile. These clusters have potential to grow. Invest in these clusters to convert them to the Dominate quadrant. These clusters are less than likely to buy your product than average and you do not have many of them in your customer base. Therefore you should reduce your marketing efforts to these clusters, because there is little potential. These clusters are less likely than average to buy your product, but you have more than average of these clusters in your customer list. You are doing better than you expected in these areas, but growth is limited. Therefore you need to maintain these customers.

Trim

Cluster Index < 100

Cluster Index < 100

Maintain

Cluster Index > 100

Cluster Index < 100

In the following example, households that watch soccer on television is plotted on the x-axis, and households that watch tennis on television is plotted on the y-axis. In this scenario you could be trying to assess which of your tennis-watching customers could be encouraged to watch soccer as well.

Sample Two Profile Cluster Index Chart

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

168

TargteProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 9: Running Charts

The areas to concentrate on are in the center of the chart. This is the area that the "battle" for customers occurs. The clusters that lie in the outer areas of the chart are not as important to concentrate on as those in the middle of the chart. The clusters at the outside indicate strong characteristics that are unlikely to be changed by increased marketing or incentives. In this example, the clusters in the Trim quadrant represent households that typically do not watch either soccer or tennis on the television. These clusters would not be ones to target in your marketing campaign. Cluster 46 shows a high potential that households watch tennis on TV, but is not quite as high for soccer watching. You could market soccer to this group to move them over to the Dominate quadrant. Refer to Viewing Cluster Information on page 177 for information on how to quickly access cluster descriptions.

Game Plan Chart

The game plan chart is based on one profile. The chart displays percent and cluster index on separate axes. The x-axis shows the percent value, or size, of a cluster. The y-axis shows the cluster index. The game plan is good for analyzing your customer base as it shows which clusters outperform others, and which clusters have the bulk of customers. The x-axis runs from 0 to 100%, with 50% as the median. The y-axis runs from 0 to 100, and 100 to infinity. This chart accounts for not only how likely people are to buy or use a product, but also how many customers represent that figure. For example, while a cluster may have a high potential to buy a product, this cluster may only represent 0.07% of your customer base. This may not be a worthwhile cluster to target as the return on investment may not be large enough. The game plan chart enables you to identify which clusters have a high potential to buy a product and represent a large customer base. The four quadrants are described as follows:

Quadrant Core Cluster Index Cluster Index > 100 Percentage % > 50 Result Highly likely to buy the product. Large percentage of customer base. Large percentage of market base. These are the best customers. They need to be maintained, and possibly targeted to increase the per-customer contribution. Highly likely to buy the product. Small percentage of customer base. Small percentage of market base. Target this group to increase customer base to aim for aggressive growth.

Expansion

Cluster Index > 100

% < 50

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

169

TargteProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 9: Running Charts

Quadrant Non-Target

Cluster Index Cluster Index < 100

Percentage % < 50

Result Unlikely to buy the product Small percentage of customer base. These are not target customers. They have a low likelihood to buy the product, and the return on investment would not be high even if they could be convinced to do so. Unlikely to buy the product Large percentage of customer base. Large percentage of market base. There are a lot of this type of people in your market that you need to convert to become customers. Invest in these customers to try and convert the households to core customers.

Conversion

Cluster Index < 100

% > 50

Note:

Some analysts recommend focusing on clusters that have an Index > 120, and a % > 2.5.

The following example plots a profile of households who have bought ski clothing in the past year.

Sample Game Plan Chart

This chart show many of the clusters are in the Non Target quadrant meaning that these clusters, especially those on the edge of the chart, are very unlikely to buy ski clothing and there are very few of them in the profile. Those in the Expansion quadrant however have a high potential to buy ski clothing, but not many of them do. These clusters could be targeted to increase the customer base and push these clusters into the Core quadrant. People from the clusters in the core quadrant are very likely to buy ski clothing, making them your core customer group.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

170

TargteProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 9: Running Charts

Refer to Viewing Cluster Information on page 177 for information on how to quickly access cluster descriptions.

Consumption to Potential Index Chart

This option requires a single weighted profile. A weighted profile is a measure of a numeric value, usually a sales value, per cluster. Refer to Creating a Filter or Weighted Profile on page 114 for information on how to create a weighted profile. Using a weighted profile enables you to analyze how much customers in particular clusters spend. The x-axis shows the Potential Index of the profile, and the y-axis indicates the Consumption Index of the profile. The Consumption Index compares a cluster's percentage of the total consumption with that cluster's percentage of households or people. It gives an indication of the amount a person or household consumes in a cluster compared to the average for the whole profile. Refer to Consumption Index in Appendix A on page 190 for a definition and calculation of this index. The Potential Index compares the cluster's percentage of households in a target profile with the households in a base profile. This shows the relative potential market in the target profile ­ how likely your customers are to consume the product. Refer to Potential Index in Appendix A on page 195 for a definition and calculation of this index. The results of this battlegram show how many households within a cluster are likely to buy a particular product and how much they are likely to buy. The four quadrants are described as follows:

Quadrant High Value Potential Index PI > 100 Consumption Index CI > 100 Analysis These clusters consume more than average for the profile. They are more likely than the average to consume the product. These are your best customers. They are more likely than average to consume the product, and when they do, they consume a lot of it. These clusters consume more than average for the profile. They are less likely than average to consume the product. While these clusters consume more than average, they are less likely to consume it. When you do attract people from these clusters, they tend to spend money.

Specialty

PI < 100

CI > 100

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

171

TargteProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 9: Running Charts

Quadrant Non-Target

Potential Index PI < 100

Consumption Index CI < 100

Analysis These clusters consume less than average for the profile. They are less likely than average to consume the product. These are not target customers. They have a low likelihood to buy the product, and there are very few of them to do the buying. These clusters consume less than average for the profile. They are more likely than the average to consume the product. These people are already likely to buy the product; but they need to be persuaded to buy more of it.

Convenience

PI > 100

CI < 100

The following example shows sales figures for a customer record profile.

Consumption to Potential Index Chart

Refer to Viewing Cluster Information on page 177 for information on how to quickly access cluster descriptions.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

172

TargteProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 9: Running Charts

Geography Target Battlegram Chart

This chart compares a collection of geographies with a weighted profile to identify geographic regions best suited for investment. This chart shows four sets of information: · Market Potential Index (MPI) on the x-axis ­ This is the bang for your buck statistic. It shows how likely people are in that cluster to buy a particular product. An index value of 100 shows that the geography or trade area you are analyzing has the same potential as the base average. The higher the index, the more likely people in that area are to buy that product. Consumption Index on the y-axis ­ This is considered in relation to the Market Potential. For example, although the geography may have a high potential to buy a particular product the total number of people who actually buy it might be low. Market Potential as the circle size ­ This shows how many people are likely to buy that product. For example if we know that 2% of customers in Cluster 5 buy high-end specialty cars and there are 200 people from Cluster 5 in our analysis area, we could expect 10 people from Cluster 5 to have a high end specialty car in that geography. The Market Potential is illustrated by the size of the circle in the chart. The higher the potential market in an area, the larger the circle. Consumption Value as the circle color ­ The color of the circle indicates the value of the geographic region. Red indicates a high value, blue indicates a low value.

·

·

·

A geography may have a high potential to buy a product, but if there are only a small amount of that type of people in the geography, it may not be worth spending money to target them in a marketing campaign. On the whole it is better to concentrate on areas that have a large amount of a specific type of customer who have a high potential to buy a specific product. The four quadrants are described as follows:

Quadrant High Value MPI MPI > 100 Consumption Index CI > 100 Result These geographies consume more than average for the profile. They are more likely than the average to consume the product. These are the best geographies for investment. People in these regions are more likely than average to consume the product, and when they do, they consume a lot of it. These geographies consume more than average for the profile. They are less likely than average to consume the product. When you do attract people from these geographies, they tend to spend money.

Specialty

MPI < 100

CI > 100

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

173

TargteProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 9: Running Charts

Quadrant Non-Target

MPI MPI < 100

Consumption Index CI < 100

Result These geographies consume less than average for the profile. They are less likely than average to consume the product. These are not target geographies for investment. They have a low likelihood to consume the product, and there are very few of them to do the buying. These geographies consume less than average for the profile. They are more likely than the average to consume the product. The people in these geographies are likely to buy the product; but they need to be persuaded to buy more of it.

Convenience

MPI > 100

CI < 100

The following example shows how well seven regions of Chicago compare as a location for a new store.

Sample Geography Target Battlegram

Polygon 6 has the highest market potential and consumption indices, putting it in the High Value quadrant. However, it has a small blue circle which shows few people are likely to consume the product in this area and the value is low. Polygon 7 however, while not as far in the High Value

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

174

TargteProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 9: Running Charts

quadrant, shows a larger customer base and a higher value. This area would be a better option based on the information given. Polygons 8 and 3 fall in the non-target quadrant and have small blue circles showing low value for this region.

Analyzing Gains and Lift Charts

A gains chart allows you to show how segmenting your customers provides a benefit over treating each customer as one from a random collection. It is a 2-dimensional set of axes starting at (0,0). The x-axis describes the individual clusters by descending order of cluster counts; from highest count to lowest count. The y-axis is defined by the Cluster Percentage of total customers. The gains chart shows two lines: · · Straight Line ­ The total number of customers distributed evenly across the clusters. Gains Curve ­ The actual cumulative counts of the individual clusters.

For example, imagine you have a set of 72 records over 72 clusters, one record per cluster. The straight line plots an even distribution of the 72 records; there are 18 records at 25% of the records, 36 records at 50% and so on. In reality however, we know that the 72 records come from 5 clusters with 25, 21, 15, 6, and 5 records respectively. Here we can see that the cluster with the most counts, 25, makes up 35% of the population. We add the next count, 21, from the next cluster to get 64% of the total. This shows that 64% of the population is concentrated within only two clusters. When plotted, these figures form the gains curve. The more concentrated your customers are in a few counts, the steeper the gains curve rises initially. The more the counts are evenly distributed across all the clusters, the straighter the gains curve. The bigger the difference between the two lines, the bigger the benefit from examining customers through cluster analysis. The point at which the maximum benefit can be determined is when the difference between the two curves is the greatest. This is called the Point of Diminishing Returns, and is marked on the graph by a yellow star. Once you have accounted for the clusters to the left of this point, any clusters targeted to the right would deliver less return than a random target. This can be considered the cutoff for clusters to target. Note: The information in a gains chart should always be considered in conjunction with information from other reports, charts, and types of analysis.

The following example shows a gains chart for a set of sample data. The point of diminishing returns can clearly be seen, and the type of curve shows that most of the counts occur within 23 clusters.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

175

TargteProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 9: Running Charts

Sample Gains Chart

Lift Chart

A lift chart is associated with the gains chart. The lift chart shows the difference between the lineardistribution and gains curves in the Gains chart. The lift chart displays results for those clusters that occur before the point of diminishing returns. The difference between the gains curve and linear-distribution line is shown so you can identify which clusters have the highest percentage of your customers.

Sample Lift Chart

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

176

TargteProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 9: Running Charts

Viewing Cluster Information

Although the bar chart gives a visual representation of the cluster index, it is also possible to view the actual numeric details of each cluster. To see the details of a particular cluster, click the TOGGLE GROUP TREE button from the Chart view.

Toggle Group Tree Button

This displays a tree view with a list of all the clusters. Click on a cluster you are interested in to display the cluster information. Click on the cluster description to view a picture that describes the type of population in that cluster. For example, the following picture describes the Family Farm Belt cluster:

Cluster Family Farm Belt

Once you have finished with the cluster descriptions click TOGGLE GROUP TREE again to hide them. Note: To return to the bar chart view, click the top level of the tree to display all the clusters as bars.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

177

TargteProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 9: Running Charts

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

178

TargteProUS47_UG.pdf

Preparing a Map for Printing

10

This chapter describes how to prepare for printing and print a map. It describes how to add a legend and a scale bar, how to set map scale accuracy, and how to create a map layout. For more in depth information on any of these topics, please refer to your MapInfo Professional User's Guide. To print a map, you need to display the full MapInfo Professional toolbars and menus. Choose TARGETPRO > PREFERENCES > PREFERENCES MANAGER and select the Show MapInfo toolbars and menus checkboxes.

In this section:

! ! ! ! ! Adding a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Scalebar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Map Scale Accuracy for Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Map Layout for Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 182 184 185 185

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 10: Preparing a Map for Printing

Adding a Legend

Adding a legend to your map helps orient you on the map and helps decipher the map symbols. When creating a legend, you can select the layers that you want to include. This way you can give a particular layer of data emphasis, or create a legend for several layers of data. You can create a cartographic legend and a theme legend, or a combination of both. A cartographic legend displays cartographic data for a map. A theme legend provides a key of the colors, symbols, and styles used in a thematic map. This section describes how to create a basic cartographic legend. To create a cartographic legend: 1. Choose MAP > CREATE LEGEND.

Create Legend Dialog 1 of 3

2. Select the layers that you want to use in the legend and click NEXT.

Create Legend Dialog 2 of 3

3. Specify the legend properties and legend frame elements that you want to change and click FINISH. Your legend displays on the screen. Click NEXT to select set attributes for each legend frame. The legend is in a separate window from the Map window. When you click on the map, the legend disappears behind the Map window. To view the legend, either move the Map window or select the legend from the open windows listed under the Window menu.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

180

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 10: Preparing a Map for Printing

Customizing the Legend

You can customize keys in the cartographic legend and the legend window, including the legend frame borders, the legend title and subtitle, and the window title. Legend keys for a layer are grouped into frames. Each frame represents a layer of data. For example, the following legend displays keys for the layers called Project1 (Test Areas), NYD (Display Streets), NYHP (Primary Highway), and NYHS (Secondary Highway).

Sample Legend

Modifications to the legend are applied on a frame by frame basis. If you select a legend key, its entire frame highlights (shown in the Sample Legend). You can delete a frame by highlighting it and then selecting the DELETE key on your keyboard. Double-clicking a frame displays the Legend Frame Properties dialog, which is used to set frame styles.

Legend Frame Properties Dialog

Within the Legend Frame Properties dialog you can modify the frame's title, add a subtitle, or add a border around the frame. You can also edit key names and text style. For details on all the Legend Frame Properties dialogs, see the MAPINFO REFERENCE. Clicking OK updates the frame with your changes.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

181

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 10: Preparing a Map for Printing

Adding a Scalebar

You can show the map scale by adding a scalebar to the map. A scalebar helps to orient you on the map, because it provides a way to measure distances on the map. Another way to set the map scale is to choose MAP > CHANGE VIEW. This scale setting affects the on-screen scale of your map according to your monitor size. Note that a scalebar is not produced. Use the on-screen scale when you are making a presentation that will be viewed directly in TargetPro.

Creating a Simple Scalebar

If you want to include scale on your map or layout for a general reference of distances, use the Scalebar tool. The Scalebar tool includes the ability to draw a scale bar in the Layout window. Before you can actually draw the scalebar, you need to load the Scalebar utility and set the font size to match the scale. 1. Load the ScaleBar utility. Choose TOOLS > TOOL MANAGER from the main menu. Scroll down the Tools list and select the checkbox to load the ScaleBar program. The program is added to the Tools menu. A ScaleBar tool is also added to the Tools menu.

Draw Scale Bar Button

2. Set the scale's font size to match the scalebar. Choose TOOLS > SCALEBAR > SET UP SCALEBAR.

Setup Scalebar Dialog

Select the Adjust font size to match scale check box. Click OK. 3. Create the scalebar. To create a scalebar and position the left edge of it anywhere on your layout, click the ScaleBar tool. Click on the layout where you want to position the left edge of the scalebar. The Draw Distance Scale in Mapper dialog displays.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

182

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 10: Preparing a Map for Printing

Draw Distance Scale in Mapper Dialog

If a Warning dialog displays, telling you that the Layout frame and the associated Map window are not currently set up to print to scale, you can adjust the Layout frame or the Map window, or ignore the message. Select the checkbox if you do not want to receive warnings about the scale again. For details on all the Draw Distance Scale in Mapper dialogs, see the MAPINFO REFERENCE. Choose the width of the scale bar and the aspect ratio. Set the text style and fill color. Click OK. Note: Choosing TOOLS > SCALEBAR > DRAW SCALEBAR from the menu, instead of using the DRAW SCALE BAR button, draws the scalebar into the lower left corner of your Layout window.

If you select the CURVE SCALE BAR WITH LATITUDE LINES check box, the scalebar is accurate only along its curve and only if the spherical calculation method is used. If you do not select the check box, the scalebar is accurate straight across, but only if the Cartesian calculation method is used. To see which distance calculation method is in use for your Map window, check the Map Options dialog (MAP > OPTIONS).

Repositioning the Scalebar

To reposition the scalebar to a new location on the map: 1. Make the scalebar's cosmetic layer selectable. Right-click on the Map window and choose Layer Control.

Layer Control Dialog

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

183

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 10: Preparing a Map for Printing

Make the Cosmetic Layer selectable by clicking the selectable check box. Clear the selectable check boxes for all the other layers to make them unselectable. This ensures that only selectable objects will be in the Cosmetic Layer. For details on all the Layer Control dialogs, see the MAPINFO REFERENCE. 2. Click MARQUEE SELECT in the TargetPro toolbar.

Marquee Select Button

Click and drag a marquee box around the scale bar. The scale bar highlights to indicate that it's selected. 3. Drag the scalebar to the new location. Please take note that you will not be able to select geographic entities from any of the map layers until you make them selectable through the Layer Control dialog. You can hide the MapInfo toolbars by unselecting TARGETPRO > SHOW MAPINFO PROFESSIONAL TOOLS.

Setting Map Scale Accuracy for Printing

Providing an accurate scale is important on the printed map. To get the correct scale for output, you must coordinate the Map window with the Layout window. You must also decide on the desired end result. For example, you may want a map that has a 1:25000 scale and fits in a nine inch Layout frame. If this is the case, you will have to alter the zoom level of your map to fit these conditions. Or, in the case where you must show a set distance across the map, you may have to allow for a larger page size. The following two formulas will help you set the right map zoom, scale, and frame width.

Setting the Scale with a Limited Frame Size

The following formula calculates the zoom that must be set in your Map window in order to have a map meet set scale and frame width criteria.

((Frame Width in Inches * Scale)/12) /5280 = Map Zoom in Miles

For example, you need to make a map that will be in a scale of 1:24000 and fit in an eight inch frame. You need to determine the zoom level that will accommodate the map scale and frame width. Calculate the following:

((8 * 24000) / 12) / 5280) = 3.03

Then use MAP > CHANGE VIEW and enter 3.03 miles as your new zoom level.

Setting the Scale with a Limit on Map Zoom

The following formula calculates the number of inches to make the frame for a map in order to meet set scale and zoom level criteria.

(Map Zoom in Miles * 5280 * 12) / Scale = Necessary Frame Width

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

184

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 10: Preparing a Map for Printing

For example, you need to make a map that will be in a scale of 1:100000, and you must view a twenty mile zoom level. You need to determine the frame size that will accommodate the scale and zoom. Calculate the following:

(20 * 5280 * 12) / 100000 = 12.67

Your frame needs to be 12.67 inches wide. If your printer is not large enough to handle this, change your layout size to spread over two pages.

Creating a Map Layout for Printing

You can either print a Map window, in which case you do not need to create a layout, or you can create a map layout to print. For presentation, use the Layout menu to bring together all views of your mapping session. Here you can combine different types of windows to create an attractive and informative presentation. Choose WINDOW > NEW LAYOUT WINDOW > FRAMES FOR ALL CURRENTLY OPEN WINDOWS. The Layout window displays the windows in your workspace. You can use the Layout window to arrange your maps, browse tables, graphs, legends, titles and logos. Refer to the chapter on Working with Layouts in the MapInfo Professional User's Guide for more information on working in the Layout window.

Printing

Once you have created the perfect map or graph, you can easily print the individual windows or the map layout.

Setting Up the Page

Before you print your map or layout, you will need to set up your page. In the Page Setup dialog (FILE > PAGE SETUP), specify the paper size, orientation, and margins.

Printing Your Map

When you have your page set up the way you want, you are ready to print. Choose FILE > PRINT to display the Print dialog. The Print dialog allows you to specify printer properties, a page range in which to print, and the number of copies that will print. Click OPTIONS in the Print dialog to fine-tune the look of the output. A Print Options dialog corresponding to the type of window you are printing displays (Map, Browser, Graph, 3DMap). For maps, for example, the Map Print Options dialog displays. Here you can specify the size of the map, how its contents will display, the scale, and its width and height. For details on all the Print Options dialogs, see the MapInfo Reference.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

185

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 10: Preparing a Map for Printing

Advanced Printing Options

Advanced printing options enable you to specify how you want MapInfo to print your map or layout, and tell MapInfo how to handle color and transparency for raster and grid images. Click ADVANCED to display the Advanced Printing dialog. The options that are selected when you first display this dialog are the default settings, which are set in the Output preferences. The Advanced Printing dialog enables you to override the default print settings for individual windows. To actually change the default print settings, you must go to the Output preferences (OPTIONS > PREFERENCES > OUTPUT) and change the print settings there.

Output Methods

You can choose from two types of output methods. Click the button next to the method you want to use. The Print Directly to Device method is the printing method used in previous versions of MapInfo. The Print using Enhanced Metafile (EMF) method generates an Enhanced Metafile from the print contents, which is then sent to the printer. This method produces good quality output while reducing printing time and spool sizes, but your printer must be able to handle the metafile.

Display and Color Options

Additional settings control Map window borders, transparency in vector and raster images, and color in raster images. Check the boxes next to the option(s) you want. To print a border around your Map window, select the PRINT BORDER FOR MAP WINDOW checkbox (this option is not available for Layout windows). To have MapInfo handle transparent fill and bitmap symbols in vector images internally, select the INTERNAL HANDLING FOR TRANSPARENT VECTOR FILLS AND SYMBOLS checkbox. If you clear the box, transparency will be handled by your printer. To have MapInfo handle transparent raster images internally, select the INTERNAL HANDLING FOR TRANSPARENT RASTER checkbox. If you clear the box, transparency in raster images will be handled by your printer. It is recommended that you check this option because many printers, such as postscript, do not handle transparent images well. Select the PRINT RASTER IN TRUE COLOR WHEN POSSIBLE checkbox to use 24-bit true color to print raster and grid images. To be able to print a raster image in true color, the image must be 24-bit and the printer must support more than 256 colors. Select a dither method from the Dither Method list to use when your image must be converted from 24-bit to 256 colors. Choose either the halftone or error diffusion dither methods.

Overriding the Default Printer

The printer listed in both the Print and Page Setup dialogs is the default printer that MapInfo uses for all print jobs. This can be either the Windows default printer or a MapInfo preferred printer that you select. Set the default printer in the printer preferences (OPTIONS > PREFERENCES > PRINTER). Both of these dialogs include the option of overriding the default printer for an individual print job. To use a printer other than the one indicated in the printer preferences to print a particular window such as Map or Layout, choose either:

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

186

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 10: Preparing a Map for Printing

·

FILE > PRINT. Click the NAME drop-down list to see a list of the printers you have access to, and select the one you want to use. This selection overrides the default printer setting for this print job. FILE > PAGE SETUP. In the Page Setup dialog, click the PRINTER to display the preferences dialog for the default printer. Click the NAME drop-down list to see a list of the available printers, and select the one you want to use. This selection overrides the default printer setting for this print job. Printer override applies only to the window you are currently printing. To actually change the default setting, you must go to the Printer preferences and specify a new default printer. See the appropriate chapter in the MapInfo Professional User's Guide for more information.

·

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

187

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Chapter 10: Preparing a Map for Printing

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

188

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

Glossary of Terms

A

Aggregate

The total amount. For example, the Aggregate Households calculates the total number of households within a specified area.

Aggregation

A process of grouping unique data. The aggregated data set has a smaller number of elements than the input data set.

Average

The number found by dividing the sum of all quantities by the total number of quantities. For example, Aggregate Household Income divided by Total Households equals Average Household Income.

Boundary File

Boundary files represent bounded regions, such as a country, a state, or a census tract. Each object in a boundary file is a bounded region. For example, in a U.S. file, each state is represented by a separate polygon.

Browser

A window for viewing a table (or database, spreadsheet or text file) in tabular form.

Cartographic Legend

A legend window that enables you to display cartographic information for any map layer in the Map window.

Cartography

The art and science of making maps. In GIS, it is also the geographic presentation and visual interpretation of data.

TargetPro User Guide

Glossary of Terms

Cluster

A cluster is a geodemographic classification of a neighborhood. Each geographic area has a cluster assignment. The clusters may be categorized into various predefined groups based on settlement patterns, such as urban and rural. The PSYTE cluster uses four settlement patterns: urban, suburban, town, and rural. Each cluster has a code associated with it. Clusters may be grouped into higher levels, but a particular cluster cannot be assigned to more than one group.

Cluster Index Score

The Cluster Index Score is calculated as follows:

Consumption si ------------------------------------- Consumption b CI si = ------------------------------------------- × 100 Households si ---------------------------------- Households b

where:

CI si = Consumption Index for the cluster in the submarket. Consumption si = Consumption for the cluster in the submarket. Consumption b = Total Consumption for the geography Households si = Household Count for the cluster. Households b = Total household count for the base area.

Concordance

A concordance file establishes a hierarchical relationship between two levels of geography. For example, if a trade area was made up of a combination of ZIP Codes, a concordance can be established making the trade area the "parent" level of geography and the ZIP Codes the "children".

Consumption Index

The Consumption Index compares a cluster's percentage of the total consumption (such as dollars spent) with that cluster's percentage of households. This is (Volume/Customers) It is calculated as:

Consumptioni ------------------------------------- Consumption b CI i = ------------------------------------------ × 100 Households i --------------------------------- Households b

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

190

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Glossary of Terms

where:

CI i = Consumption Index for the cluster Consumption i = Consumption for the cluster Consumption b = Total Consumption for the geography Households i = Household Count for the cluster. Households b = Household Count for the geography

Coordinates

An x,y location in a Cartesian coordinate system, or a Longitude, Latitude location in an earth coordinate system. Coordinates represent locations on a map relative to other locations. Earth coordinate systems may use the equator and the Greenwich prime meridian as fixed reference points. Plane coordinate systems describe a two-dimensional x,y location in terms of distance from a fixed reference and are usually in the first quadrant so that all coordinates are positive numbers.

Cosmetic Layer

The topmost layer of a Map window. Objects may be placed in this layer such as map titles and graphic objects. It is always displayed, and all objects placed in the Cosmetic Layer must be saved to a new or existing layer.

Custom Geographies

Geographies that are not known to TargetPro's database engine. These include geographies drawn on the map, such as trade areas and polygons, and selections made from layers opened using MapInfo Professional.

Data Sources

An ODBC data source is an SQL database and the information you need to access that database. For example, an SQL Server data source is the SQL Server database, the server on which it resides, and the network used to access that server.

Database

Any organized collection of data. The term is often used to refer to a single file or table of information.

Default

The value or option used in the absence of explicit specification. Often the original setting or value for a variable.

Degrees Longitude, Degrees Latitude, Decimal Degrees

Degrees (longitude and latitude) are coordinates used to represent locations on the surface of the earth. Longitude, or X-coordinate, represents a location's east-west position, where any location west of the prime meridian has a negative X value. Latitude, or Y-coordinate, represents a location's north-south position, where any location south of the equator has a negative Y value.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

191

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Glossary of Terms

Density

Population divided by the geographic region's land area. A simple basis for relating population to a geographic region's size. Thus, two regions with the same population can have sharply divergent densities because of difference in land area. The figure may suffer because the land area will include railroad freight yards, wildlife preserves, industrial parks and other non residential areas, resulting in a misleading density level.

Deselect

The process of undoing a selection. The object or area you deselect will not be affected by subsequent commands. Performed by selecting another area, by clicking in a blank area, or by executing the Unselect All command.

Dot Density Map

A type of thematic map that carries information by showing a large number of tiny dots, wherein each dot represents some specific unit quantity. For example, for a population dot density map each dot might represent 10,000 people.

Drawing Toolbar

A MapInfo window containing twelve buttons that access tools for drawing and modifying objects on your map or layout.

EDW

Enterprise Data Warehouse. This is a data warehouse that is maintained by the data provider.

Edit Handle

The small boxes that appear at the four corners of the minimum bounding rectangle of an object in an editable layer of a Map window or in a Layout window.

Export

The process whereby a program saves information in a file to be used by another program.

Expression

A statement containing two parts: 1) column names and constants (i.e., specific data values, and 2) functions (e.g., area) and operators (e.g., +, -, >), in order to extract or derive information from a database.

Field

A field in a table corresponds to a column in a Browser. A field contains a specific type of information about an object, such as, name, abbreviation, land area, price, population, and so forth. The record for each object consists of that object's values for each of the fields in the database.

File

A collection of information that has been given a name and is stored on some electronic medium such as a tape or disk. A file can be a document or an application.

Fill Pattern

The design and color used to fill a closed geography.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

192

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Glossary of Terms

Formula

A formula is a valid arithmetic expression consisting of one or more variables, one or more operators, and zero or more numeric constants.

Generalization

The process of simplifying a data set to a size that can be easily manipulated and represented. For example, a river may have many twists and turns; however, if a map covers a very large area, the river may be represented as a straight line. Similarly, in a map of a very large area, a city might be represented as a point marker.

Geocoding

Geocoding is the process of assigning to a street address a latitude and longitude coordinate and/ or geographic codes that associate an address to a census geography.

Geographic Information System (GIS)

A computer software system with which spatial information may be captured, stored, analyzed, displayed, and retrieved.

Graduated Symbols Map

A type of thematic map that shows symbols (point objects) in a variety of sizes to indicate which objects have higher or lower numerical values.

Grid Surface Map

A type of thematic map that displays data as continuous color gradations across the map. This type of thematic map is produced by an interpolation of point data from the source table. A grid file from the data interpolation is generated and displays as a raster image in a Map window.

Import

The process whereby a program loads a file that is the output of another program.

Individual Values Map

A type of thematic map that shades records according to individual values.

Jump

Text graphics or parts of graphics that provide links to other Help topics or more information on the current Help topic.

Latitude

The horizontal lines on a map that increase from 0 degrees at the Equator to 90 degrees at both the North (+90.0 degrees) and South (-90.0 degrees) poles. Used to describe the North-South position of a point as measured usually in degrees or decimal degrees above or below the equator.

Layer

Layers are the basic building block of maps in TargetPro. A map typically consists of several superimposed layers (e.g., a layer of street data superimposed over a layer of region boundaries). When a table appears in a Map window, it occupies a layer in that Map window. Typically, each map layer corresponds to one open table; there is also a special Cosmetic Layer that contains map objects representing temporary map annotations (e.g., labels). See Cosmetic Layer.

Legend

A legend describes the symbols used in a map.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

193

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Glossary of Terms

LDW

Local Data Warehouse. A database within your intranet, that acts as the gateway to the Replica Data Warehouse (RDW) and to your own data warehouse.

Line, Line Object

A map object defined by a set of sequential coordinates that may represent the generalized shape of a geographic feature (e.g., street centerlines, railroads, cables). A MapInfo street map is a collection of thousands of line objects.

Longitude

The vertical lines on a map, running from the North to South poles, used to describe the east-west position of a point. The position is reported as the number of degrees east (to -180.0 degrees) or west (to +180.0 degrees) of the prime meridian (0 degrees). Lines of longitude are farthest apart at the Equator and intersect at both poles, and therefore, are not parallel.

Map

A map is a graphic representation of part of the earth's surface. It conveys information easily and readily to a reader. It is a snap-shot of time.

Map Scale

A statement of a measure of the map and the equivalent measure on the earth. Often expressed as a representative ratio of distance, such as 1:10,000. This means that one unit of distance on the map (e.g., one inch) represents 10,000 of the same units of distance on the earth. The term scale must be used carefully. Technically, a map of a single city block is large-scale (e.g., 1:12,000), while a map of an entire country is small-scale (e.g., 1:1,000,000). A 1:1,000,000 map is considered small-scale because of the small numeric value obtained when you divide 1 by 1,000,000.

Map Window

A window that allows you to view a table as a map.

Market Potential Index (MPI)

This is an estimate of relative market potential. The MPI shows the relationship between the potential for a product or service in each market and the total potential over all markets. The calculations to determine a cluster-weighted profile are complex. The calculations estimate the potential in an area based on that area's cluster profile based on its census demographics and the cluster profile of actual customers. The MPI is the ratio of two cluster-weighted means. These are calculated as:

CWM = i = 1.n ------------------------------------- CP

i = 1.n

( CI × CP )

where:

CWM = Cluster Weighted Mean for the area of interest.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

194

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Glossary of Terms

CI = Cluster Index score for the area of interest. CP = Cluster Penetration for the area of interest (the proportion of households in the cluster) i = 1.n = Iterate through each cluster in the cluster system.

Market Penetration Index for SubMarkets

The market penetration index for a submarket is calculated as:

CWM s MPI i = INT ---------------- × 100 CWM b

where:

MPI s = Market Potential Index for the submarket. CWM s = Cluster Weighted Mean for the submarket. CWM b = Cluster Weighted Mean for the base area.

Match

Match is a term used to describe when the Geocoder has successfully found the geographic location of an input record (or street address).

Median

A calculated value that divides the distribution in an area into two equal parts. One half falls above the value and one half falls below. For example, if the median age is 21, half the population is younger than 21 and the other half is older than 21.

MIF

MapInfo Interchange Format. This is the ASCII file format common to MapInfo products; it is used to import into or export from MapInfo software.

Neighborhood Coverage Area (NCA)

An NCA is the collection of block groups that contains at least one record from your data.

ODBC Driver

An ODBC driver is a dynamic-link library (.DLL) file that MapInfo uses to connect to an SQL database. Each type of SQL database requires a different ODBC driver.

ODBC Table

An ODBC table is a table residing in a remote SQL database.

Potential Index

The Potential Index is the ratio of two percentages. Like percentages, indexes provide a standard measure for comparing sets of values which differ greatly in magnitude.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

195

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Glossary of Terms

The potential index for a cluster is calculated as follows:

Count ti ----------------- Count t PI = ------------------------- × 100 Count bi ------------------ Count b

where:

PI i = Potential Index for the cluster. Count ti = Household count for the cluster in the target area. Count t = Total household count for the target area. Count bi = Household count for the cluster in the base area. Count b = Total household count for the base area.

Interpreting the Magnitude of the Index An index ranges from 0 to infinity, with the mid point being 100. Values below 100 and values over 100 are reciprocals of each other. Example 1 Cluster 01 consumes 4% of product A and 2% of Product B The Potential Index for Product A vs Product B is The Potential Index for Product B vs Product A is

100 × ( 4 / 2 ) = 200 100 × ( 2 / 4 ) = 50

Therefore 50 and 200 are essentially the same index, but from a different perspective. The difference comes simply from choosing which product is the numerator and denominator. Example 2 Similarly, 20 and 500 are the same in the following example:

100 × ( 2 / 10 ) = 20 100 × ( 10 / 2 ) = 500

Pie Chart Map

A type of thematic map that displays a pie chart of thematic variables for each record in the table from which the map is based.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

196

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Glossary of Terms

Pixel

The acronym for picture element. The smallest dot that can be displayed on a computer screen. If a screen is described as having a resolution of 1,024 x 768, the screen shows 1,024 pixels from right to left, and 768 pixels from top to bottom. Each character, object, or line on the screen is composed of numerous pixels. · · · · Variables, geographies, and reports created by the user. Tab files. Information about the TargetPro work space (i.e., window arrangement). TargetPro-specific information such as the default base geography for a set of data.

Point, Point Object

A map object defined by a single x,y coordinate pair. Each point object is represented by a symbol style (e.g., circle, square, triangle, etc.).

Pointer

An arrow-shaped cursor on the screen that can be manipulated by a mouse.

Polygon, Polygon Object

A class of spatial objects having area and perimeter, and representing a closed boundary region of uniform characteristics. The Polygon tool creates a single polygon.

Profile

Also called Cluster Profile. This is a list of numeric values, one for each cluster in the system. Some examples of the numeric values can be individual consumers, dollars spent, households, or the proportion of users responding to a survey question.

Project

A TargetPro project contains information specific to the user and the current session. This information is used to manage the MapInfo Professional workspace and includes:

Projection

A mathematical model that transforms the locations of features on the earth's surface to locations on a two-dimensional surface, such as a paper map. Since a map is an attempt to represent a spherical object (the earth) on a flat surface, all projections have some degree of distortion. A map projection can preserve area, distance, shape or direction but only a globe can preserve all of these attributes. Some projections (e.g., Mercator) produce maps well suited for navigation. Other projections (e.g., equal-area projections, such as Lambert) produce maps well suited for visual analysis.

PSYTE

PSYTE is a market segmentation system that incorporates many behavioral data elements in addition to demographic and socio-economic variables. It classifies neighborhoods into approximately 60 distinct groups. Each group has differences based on income level, purchasing power, education, ethnicity, and many other factors. PSYTE is constructed based on the following variables: · · · Socio-economic and demographic census data. Measures of settlement context, density, and access to urban amenities. New vehicle registrations.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

197

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Glossary of Terms

·

Behavioral purchase data.

Ranged Map

A type of thematic map that displays data according to ranges set by the user. The ranges are shaded using colors or patterns.

Region

An enclosed area defined by one or more polygons. If a region contains one or more lakes or islands, each lake or island is a separate polygon.

Registered Geographies

Registered geographies are the levels (approximately 10) that are shipped with TargetPro and all the geographic layers and levels that have been imported and registered using the Data Manager.

RDW

Replica Data Warehouse. A replica of the Enterprise Data Warehouse (EDW), which acts as the central repository of TargetPro geometry and demographic data. This may be hosted by you or by the data provider.

Scale Bar

A map element that graphically depicts the map scale (e.g., 0 ­5 ­ 10 km).

Screening

The process of defining criteria for a subset of data from a larger dataset. This is sometimes known as filtering. A valid screening expressing consists of one or more logical expressions, which compare variables to other variables, or variables to contents. Screening lets you filter geographic areas to be included in Area Analysis. Only those areas that pass the screening expression are included in the report or shown on a thematic map.

Scroll Bar

Bars along the right and bottom sides of each window that allow you to scroll the window view. Clicking on the shaded area moves one window screen at a time.

Source

The company that created the data.

Standard Geographies

Standard geographies are the levels (approximately 10) that are shipped with TargetPro. Standard geographies do not include those geographic layers and levels that have been imported and registered using the Data Manager.

Structured Query Language (SQL)

A standard language used for analyzing information stored in relational databases. MapInfo's database engine is based on the SQL standard.

Symbol, Symbol Object

A small, relatively simple shape (e.g., square, circle, star, push-pin) used to graphically represent a point object (e.g., a customer location).

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

198

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Glossary of Terms

TAB File

TAB files are a simple format for storing geometric location and attribute information of geographic features. These files contain the records or maps that come from MapInfo, or that are created using MapInfo Professional software.

Table

MapInfo databases are organized as tables. Tables are made up of rows and columns. Each row contains information about a particular geographic feature, event, etc. Each column contains a particular kind of information about the items in the table. MapInfo can contain graphic objects representing geographic objects. Such tables can be displayed as maps.

Target Group Index (TGI)

The TGI is computed by comparing the penetration of the Target Group with the entire profile. More formally, the total customer count for the Target Group clusters is computed, and the total base count for the Target Group clusters is computed. The ratio of users to base users is the Target Group Penetration. The total penetration is then computed by performing the same calculation over all the clusters (not just the Target Group clusters). Finally, the index is computed by dividing the Target Group Penetration by the Total Penetration and multiplying the result by 100.

Text Cursor

A blinking vertical bar that shows the position where text can be edited, inserted, or deleted.

Thematic Layer

A layer containing the thematic settings for a map layer. Thematic layers are drawn directly over the map layer on which the thematic settings are based. They are also drawn in a particular order, depending on the number of thematic layers you have and the type of thematic map objects you are creating.

Thematic Map

A type of map that uses a variety of graphic styles (e.g., colors or fill patterns) to graphically display information about the map's underlying data. Thus, a thematic map of sales territories might show one region in deep red (to indicate the region has a large number of customers), while showing another region in very pale red (to indicate the region has relatively few customers). Refer to Dot Density Map, Graduated Symbols Map, Grid Surface Map, Individual Values Map, Pie Chart Map, and Ranged Map.

Thematic Shading

Map objects -- points, lines, regions -- that have been shaded, using a pattern and/or color, according to some point of information about the object, or theme (population, size, annual rainfall, date, and so forth).

Thematic Variable

The data values displayed on a thematic map. A thematic variable can be a field or expression.

Theme Legend

MapInfo Professional's original style legend that allows you to display legends for thematic maps and graphs. MapInfo Professional automatically creates a theme legend window for a thematic map. Customize its display through the Modify Thematic Map dialog. See Cartographic Legend.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

199

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Glossary of Terms

Vintage

The date that the map or data was created or updated.

Window

In MapInfo Professional, Map windows, Browser windows, Graph windows, and Layout windows are the major types of windows. They display the data stored in tables. The Toolbars, map legends, and the Info tool window are other types of windows.

Workspace

A saved configuration of open MapInfo Professional tables and windows.

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

200

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

Reserved Keywords

B

Microsoft® SQL ServerTM 2000 uses reserved keywords for defining, manipulating, and accessing databases. Reserved keywords are part of the grammar of the Transact-SQL language used by SQL Server to parse and understand Transact-SQL statements and batches. Although it is syntactically possible to use SQL Server reserved keywords as identifiers and object names in Transact-SQL scripts, this can be done only using delimited identifiers.

TargetPro User Guide

Reserved Keywords

SQL Server Reserved Keywords

The following table lists SQL Server reserved keywords.

ADD ALL ALTER AND ANY AS ASC AUTHORIZATION BACKUP BEGIN BETWEEN BREAK BROWSE BULK BY CASCADE CASE CHECK CHECKPOINT CLOSE CLUSTERED COALESCE COLLATE COLUMN COMMIT COMPUTE CONSTRAINT CONTAINS EXCEPT EXEC EXECUTE EXISTS EXIT FETCH FILE FILLFACTOR FOR FOREIGN FREETEXT FREETEXTTABLE FROM FULL FUNCTION GOTO GRANT GROUP HAVING HOLDLOCK IDENTITY IDENTITY_INSERT IDENTITYCOL IF IN INDEX INNER INSERT PERCENT PLAN PRECISION PRIMARY PRINT PROC PROCEDURE PUBLIC RAISERROR READ READTEXT RECONFIGURE REFERENCES REPLICATION RESTORE RESTRICT RETURN REVOKE RIGHT ROLLBACK ROWCOUNT ROWGUIDCOL RULE SAVE SCHEMA SELECT SESSION_USER SET

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

202

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Reserved Keywords

CONTAINSTABLE CONTINUE CONVERT CREATE CROSS CURRENT CURRENT_DATE CURRENT_TIME CURRENT_TIMESTAMP CURRENT_USER CURSOR DATABASE DBCC DEALLOCATE DECLARE DEFAULT DELETE DENY DESC DISK DISTINCT DISTRIBUTED DOUBLE DROP DUMMY DUMP ELSE END ERRLVL ESCAPE

INTERSECT INTO IS JOIN KEY KILL LEFT LIKE LINENO LOAD NATIONAL NOCHECK NONCLUSTERED NOT NULL NULLIF OF OFF OFFSETS ON OPEN OPENDATASOURCE OPENQUERY OPENROWSET OPENXML OPTION OR ORDER OUTER OVER

SETUSER SHUTDOWN SOME STATISTICS SYSTEM_USER TABLE TEXTSIZE THEN TO TOP TRAN TRANSACTION TRIGGER TRUNCATE TSEQUAL UNION UNIQUE UPDATE UPDATETEXT USE USER VALUES VARYING VIEW WAITFOR WHEN WHERE WHILE WITH WRITETEXT

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

203

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Reserved Keywords

In addition, the SQL-92 standard defines a list of reserved keywords. Avoid using SQL-92 reserved keywords for object names and identifiers. The ODBC reserved keyword list that follows is the same as the SQL-92 reserved keyword list. Note: The SQL-92 reserved keywords list sometimes can be more restrictive than SQL Server and at other times less restrictive. For example, the SQL-92 reserved keywords list contains INT, which SQL Server does not need to distinguish as a reserved keyword.

Transact-SQL reserved keywords can be used as identifiers or names of databases or database objects, such as tables, columns, views, and so on. Use either quoted identifiers or delimited identifiers. The use of reserved keywords as the names of variables and stored procedure parameters is not restricted.

ODBC Reserved Keywords

The following words are reserved for use in ODBC function calls. These words do not constrain the minimum SQL grammar; however, to ensure compatibility with drivers that support the core SQL grammar, applications should avoid using these keywords. This is the current list of ODBC reserved keywords. For more information, see Microsoft ODBC 3.0 Programmer's Reference, Volume 2, Appendix C.

ABSOLUTE ACTION ADA ADD ALL ALLOCATE ALTER AND ANY ARE AS ASC ASSERTION AT AUTHORIZATION AVG EXEC EXECUTE EXISTS EXTERNAL EXTRACT FALSE FETCH FIRST FLOAT FOR FOREIGN FORTRAN FOUND FROM FULL GET OVERLAPS PAD PARTIAL PASCAL POSITION PRECISION PREPARE PRESERVE PRIMARY PRIOR PRIVILEGES PROCEDURE PUBLIC READ REAL REFERENCES

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

204

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Reserved Keywords

BEGIN BETWEEN BIT BIT_LENGTH BOTH BY CASCADE CASCADED CASE CAST CATALOG CHAR CHAR_LENGTH CHARACTER CHARACTER_LENGTH CHECK CLOSE COALESCE COLLATE COLLATION COLUMN COMMIT CONNECT CONNECTION CONSTRAINT CONSTRAINTS CONTINUE CONVERT CORRESPONDING COUNT

GLOBAL GO GOTO GRANT GROUP HAVING HOUR IDENTITY IMMEDIATE IN INCLUDE INDEX INDICATOR INITIALLY INNER INPUT INSENSITIVE INSERT INT INTEGER INTERSECT INTERVAL INTO IS ISOLATION JOIN KEY LANGUAGE LAST LEADING

RELATIVE RESTRICT REVOKE RIGHT ROLLBACK ROWS SCHEMA SCROLL SECOND SECTION SELECT SESSION SESSION_USER SET SIZE SMALLINT SOME SPACE SQL SQLCA SQLCODE SQLERROR SQLSTATE SQLWARNING SUBSTRING SUM SYSTEM_USER TABLE TEMPORARY THEN

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

205

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Reserved Keywords

CREATE CROSS CURRENT CURRENT_DATE CURRENT_TIME CURRENT_TIMESTAMP CURRENT_USER CURSOR DATE DAY DEALLOCATE DEC DECIMAL DECLARE DEFAULT DEFERRABLE DEFERRED DELETE DESC DESCRIBE DESCRIPTOR DIAGNOSTICS DISCONNECT DISTINCT DOMAIN DOUBLE DROP ELSE END END-EXEC

LEFT LEVEL LIKE LOCAL LOWER MATCH MAX MIN MINUTE MODULE MONTH NAMES NATIONAL NATURAL NCHAR NEXT NO NONE NOT NULL NULLIF NUMERIC OCTET_LENGTH OF ON ONLY OPEN OPTION OR ORDER

TIME TIMESTAMP TIMEZONE_HOUR TIMEZONE_MINUTE TO TRAILING TRANSACTION TRANSLATE TRANSLATION TRIM TRUE UNION UNIQUE UNKNOWN UPDATE UPPER USAGE USER USING VALUE VALUES VARCHAR VARYING VIEW WHEN WHENEVER WHERE WITH WORK WRITE

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

206

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Reserved Keywords

ESCAPE EXCEPT EXCEPTION

OUTER OUTPUT

YEAR ZONE

Future Keywords

The following keywords could be reserved in future releases of SQL Server as new features are implemented. Consider avoiding the use of these words as identifiers:

ABSOLUTE ACTION ADMIN AFTER AGGREGATE ALIAS ALLOCATE ARE ARRAY ASSERTION AT BEFORE BINARY BIT BLOB BOOLEAN BOTH BREADTH CALL CASCADED CAST FOUND FREE GENERAL GET GLOBAL GO GROUPING HOST HOUR IGNORE IMMEDIATE INDICATOR INITIALIZE INITIALLY INOUT INPUT INT INTEGER INTERVAL ISOLATION ITERATE PRESERVE PRIOR PRIVILEGES READS REAL RECURSIVE REF REFERENCING RELATIVE RESULT RETURNS ROLE ROLLUP ROUTINE ROW ROWS SAVEPOINT SCROLL SCOPE SEARCH SECOND

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

207

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Reserved Keywords

CATALOG CHAR CHARACTER CLASS CLOB COLLATION COMPLETION CONNECT CONNECTION CONSTRAINTS CONSTRUCTOR CORRESPONDING CUBE CURRENT_PATH CURRENT_ROLE CYCLE DATA DATE DAY DEC DECIMAL DEFERRABLE DEFERRED DEPTH DEREF DESCRIBE DESCRIPTOR DESTROY DESTRUCTOR DETERMINISTIC

LANGUAGE LARGE LAST LATERAL LEADING LESS LEVEL LIMIT LOCAL LOCALTIME LOCALTIMESTAMP LOCATOR MAP MATCH MINUTE MODIFIES MODIFY MODULE MONTH NAMES NATURAL NCHAR NCLOB NEW NEXT NO NONE NUMERIC OBJECT OLD

SECTION SEQUENCE SESSION SETS SIZE SMALLINT SPACE SPECIFIC SPECIFICTYPE SQL SQLEXCEPTION SQLSTATE SQLWARNING START STATE STATEMENT STATIC STRUCTURE TEMPORARY TERMINATE THAN TIME TIMESTAMP TIMEZONE_HOUR TIMEZONE_MINUTE TRAILING TRANSLATION TREAT TRUE UNDER

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

208

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Reserved Keywords

DICTIONARY DIAGNOSTICS DISCONNECT DOMAIN DYNAMIC EACH END-EXEC EQUALS EVERY EXCEPTION EXTERNAL FALSE FIRST FLOAT

ONLY OPERATION ORDINALITY OUT OUTPUT PAD PARAMETER PARAMETERS PARTIAL PATH POSTFIX PREFIX PREORDER PREPARE

UNKNOWN UNNEST USAGE USING VALUE VARCHAR VARIABLE WHENEVER WITHOUT WORK WRITE YEAR ZONE

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

209

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Reserved Keywords

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

210

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Index

Index

A

About TargetPro command 15 Accessing Data Manager 64­66 Add a layer to the project from a TAB file 14 from Registered Geographies 14 Add Category dialog 153 Adding legend 180 map layer 25 scalebar 182­184 Addition and subtraction operators 104 Additional attribute data, registering 75­78 Address match 43­44 Advanced print options 186 Aggregate, definition 189 Aggregation, definition 189 Areas built from registered boundaries, registering 79­81 Arrange Windows left-handed 15 right-handed 15 undock 15 Authentication 8 Average, definition 189 New Project 12 Open Project 12 Pan 12 Polygon Select 12, 51 Profile Manager 13, 114, 118, 120, 123­124 Quick View 12, 136 Radius Select 12, 51 Report Properties 147 Reports 13 Rings Around Set of Points 13, 41 Save Project 12 Select Object 12, 50 Thematic Map 13 Theme Properties 26 Zoom in 12, 22 Zoom out 12, 22

C

Capture Tool button 13 Capturing customers using a customer dataset 56­60 using a market demographic 60­62 Cartographic legend 180, 189 Cartography, definition 189 Centroid display 27 Change Ownership command 66 Changing label style 50 layer properties 26­27 Cluster, definition 190 Color options, printing 186 Components documentation 5 software 4­5 Concordance, definition 190 Contiguous geography 51 Conventions, document 6 Coordinates, definition 191 Cosmetic Layer definition 191 make selectable 184 Create Legend dialog 180 Create Polygon button 12, 45 Create Rings button 12, 39­40 Creating buffers around a set of points 41­42 custom geographies 39­49 using MI Pro tools 49 custom reports 152 custom variables 103­104 drive distance polygon 46­49 drive time polygon 46­49 filter/weighted profiles 114

B

Batch Geocode command 65 Batch geocoding 99­102 Binary operators 104 Block Centroid Correspondence command 65 Boundary data, registering 81­84 Boundary File, definition 189 Brackets 104 Browse Table dialog 52 Browser definition 189 selecting geography from 51­52 Browsing a map layer 25 Buttons Capture Tool 13 Create Polygon 12, 45 Create Rings 12, 39­40 Data Manager 13, 64 Delete Geographic Selection 13 Draw Scale Bar 182 Drive Distance 13, 47 Drive Time 13, 46 Find Address 12, 42­44 Find Geography 13, 38 Geography Selector 13, 52 Grabber 22 Marquee Select 12, 51, 184

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

211

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Index

formula 103­104 Geography Based Constant variable 105­106 Geography Based Parent variable 106 map layout 185 new project 9 point 39­40 point with rings 40­41 point with rings from address 42­43 point with rings from intersection 43­44 point with rings from Lat/Long 44­45 polygon 45­46 profiles 113 Radius Based variable 105 True Median variable 105 Crystal Reports 4 Custom data sources 5 legend 181 reports 155 Custom Geographies and MapInfo Professional 49 creating 39­49 definition 191 Custom reports creating 152 deleting 157 managing 155 Custom Variable command 66 Custom Variable Editor 103 Customer dataset capture tool 56­60

D

Data importing 66­71 linking 72­73 registering 74­96 Data Manager accessing 64­66 button 13, 64 command 14 deleting linked server 99 dialog 64 importing data 66­71 linking data 72­73 menu 65­66 registering data 74­96 toolbar 65­66 Data Manager menu 102 Data sources custom 5 definition 191 Database, definition 191 Decimal Degrees, definition 191 Decimal logarithm 104 Default definition 191

printer, overriding 186­187 Degrees Latitude, definition 191 Degrees Longitude, definition 191 Delete Block Centroid Correspondence command 65 Delete Data command 65 Delete Geographic Selection button 13 Delete Link Server command 65 Deleting a linked server 99 custom reports 157 geographies 55 target group 130 Density, definition 192 Deselect, definition 192 Detail Report 152 Dialogs Add Category 153 Area Selection 145 Browse Table 52 Create Legend 180 Custom Report Properties 152 Data Manager 64 Display Options 27 Draw Distance Scale in Mapper 183 Find 147 Find Geography 38 Geography Selector 53 Label Options 33 Label Style 50 Layer Control 26, 183 Layer Manager 16, 24 Layer Manager pop-up menu 24 Legend Frame Properties 181 Line Style 35 Map Selection 136 Project Selection 9 Report Properties 148 Ring Properties 40 Select Report to Run 146 Setup Scalebar 182 Text Style 35 Welcome 9 Display geography selections 55 lines, nodes, centroids 27 mode 27 options dialog 27 Documentation conventions 6 overview 5 Dot Density Map, definition 192 Draw Distance Scale in Mapper dialog 183 Draw Scale Bar button 182 Drawing Toolbar, definition 192 Drive Distance button 13, 47 Drive Time button 13, 46 Drive Time/Distance, creating trade areas 46­49

TargetPro 4.7

© 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

212

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Index

DTS Import/Export wizard 69­71 choose a data source 69 select destination location 70 select source table and views 71

E

Edit Handle, definition 192 EDW, definition 192 Example, zoom layering 28 Exponentiation 104 Export Data command 65 Export Project Selections command 14 Export To A MapInfo Workspace command 14 Export, definition 192 Expression definition 192 variable, creating 103­104

working with selections 55 Geography Based Constant variable, creating 105­106 Geography Based Parent variable, creating 106 Geography Selector button 13, 52 command 14 dialog 53 menu 53 Geolist report 152 GIS, definition 193 Grabber button 22 Graduated Symbols Map, definition 193 Grid Surface Map, definition 193

I

Import Data command 65 Import Project Selection command 14 Import, definition 193 Importing data 66­71 from other data source 69­71 from TAB file 68­69 Individual Values Map, definition 193 Interface, learning 12­16

F

Features 3 Field, definition 192 File, definition 192 Fill Pattern, definition 192 Find Address button 12, 42­44 Finding available reports 147 Find Geography button 13, 38 geography by name 52­54 geography from a table browser 51­52 geography on a map 38 Formula creating 103­104 definition 193 example 104 Frame Properties dialog 181 Frame size, set for map scale 184

J

Jump, definition 193

K

Key Map 15

L

Label Options dialog 33 Label Style dialog 50 Labels change style 50 positioning 36 setting options 33­36 styles 35 visibility 34 with column 34 with expressions 34 zoom-layering 29 Latitude, definition 193 Layer Control dialog 26, 183 Layer Manager about 24 dialog 24 menu 24­26 overview 16 pop-up menu 24 refreshing 26 Layers adding 25 browsing 25 definition 193 display lines, nodes, centroids 27

TargetPro 4.7

G

Generalization, definition 193 Geocoded data, registering 85­90 Geocoding batch 99­102 definition 193 Geographies deleting 55 Geography creating custom 39­49 displaying selections 55 entities 37 finding on a map 38 saving selections 55 selecting by name 26, 52­54 selecting contiguous 51 selecting from browser 51­52 selecting non-contiguous 51 selecting on the map 50­52 working with 37­62

© 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

213

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Index

display mode 27 example 23 label options 33­36 Layer Control dialog 26, 183 properties, customizing 26­27 properties, viewing 25 removing 25 reordering 25 selecting the active 25 zoom 28­29 Layouts, reports 153 LDW, definition 194 Learning the interface 12­16 Left-handed workspace 11, 15 Legend adding 180 customizing 181 definition 193 example 181 Line display 27 Line Style dialog 35 Line/Line Object, definition 194 Link Server command 65 Linking data 72­73 Loading the ScaleBar utility 182 Logarithm 104 Login As New command 15 Longitude, definition 194

Marquee Select button 12, 51, 184 Match address 43­44 definition 195 Mathematical operators precedence 104 Median, definition 195 Menus Data Manager 102 Geography Selector 53 Layer Manager 24­26 options 13­15 Microsoft SQL Server authentication 8 DTS Import/Export wizard 69­71 overview 5 MIF, definition 195 Multiplication and division operators 104

N

Navigation, key map 15 New Project, command 14 Node display 27 Non Geocoded data, registering 91­96 Non-contiguous geography 51

O

ODBC Driver, definition 195 ODBC Table, definition 195 Open Project command 14 Open Recent Project command 14 Operators, precedence 104 Options, printing 186 Output, printing methods 186 Overriding default printer 186­187

M

Make This The Default Workspace command 14 Managing custom reports 155 target groups 128­133 Map definition 194 finding geography on 38 key map 15 layout for printing 185 panning 22­23 printing 185­187 scale accuracy 184­185 selecting geography 50­52 units 41, 46, 48 window 16 zoom layering 28­29 zoom limit to scale 184­185 zooming 22 Map Scale, definition 194 Map Selection dialog 136 Map Window, definition 194 MapInfo Professional documentation 5 overview 4 Mapping concepts 21­36 Market demographic capture tool 60­62 Marquee box 22

P

Page setup 185 Pan button 12 Panning a map 22­23 Parentheses 104 Password 8 Pie Chart Map, definition 196 Pixel, definition 197 Point Object, definition 197 Point with rings creating 40­41 creating from address 42­43 creating from intersection 43­44 creating from Lat/Long 44­45 Point, creating 39­40 Pointer, definition 197 Polygon Create Polygon button 12 creating 45­46 Draw Tool 45 drive distance 46­49 drive time 46­49

TargetPro 4.7

© 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

214

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Index

selecting 12, 51 Polygon/Polygon Object, definition 197 Precedence of operators 104 Preparing a map for printing 179­187 Printing advanced options 186 display/color options 186 map 185­187 map layout 185 order of reports 158 output options 186 override default printer 186­187 Product components documents 5 software 4­5 Profile Manager button 13, 114, 118, 120, 123­124 command 14 Profile, definition 197 Profiles creating 113 creating filter/weighted 114 working with 126 Project creating new 9 definition 197 New Project button 12 Open Project button 12 private 10 public 10 Save Project button 12 saving 11 Project Selection dialog 9 Projection, definition 197 Properties command 65 dialog 152 labels 35 PSYTE, definition 197 Public, projects 10

areas built from registered boundaries 79­81 boundary 81­84 geocoded 85­90 non geocoded 91­96 Removing, map layers 25 Reordering map layers 25 Report Properties button 147 dialog 148 setting 147­148 Reports 135­158 button 13 command 14 custom properties dialog 152 custom, creating 152 custom, upgrading 157­158 deleting 157 layout, redesigning 153 managing custom 155 printing order 158 properties dialog 148 running 144 running multiple 158 types of 137 using custom geographies 49 Repositioning the Scalebar 183­184 Right-Handed, workspace setup 15 Rings Around Set of Points button 13, 41 Running a report 144 multiple reports 158

S

Sample Legend 181 Save Project As command 14 Save Project command 14 Saving geography selections 55 projects 11, 14 Scalebar adding 182­184 definition 198 repositioning 183­184 utility 182 Screening, definition 198 Scroll Bar, definition 198 Search, this book 6 Select Object button 50 Select Report to Run dialog 146 Selectable icon 51 Selecting active layer 25 contiguous geographies 51 geographies 26 geographies within/contained by 54 geography by name 52­54 geography from browser 51­52 geography on the map 50­52

TargetPro 4.7

Q

Quick View 136­137 button 12, 136 Quit TargetPro command 15

R

Radius Based variable, creating 105 Radius Select button 12, 51 Ranged Map, definition 198 RDW, definition 198 Refreshing the Layer Manager 26 Region, definition 198 Register Data command 65 Registered geographies, definition 198 Registering data 74­96 additional attribute 75­78

© 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

215

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

TargetPro User Guide

Index

marquee 12 marquee box example 22 non-contiguous geography 51 polygon 12, 51 radius 12, 51 saving selections 55 Select Object button 12 Selections, displaying previous 55 Set of points, creating buffers 41­42 Setting label options 33­36 label positions 36 label styles 35 label visibility 34 label with column 34 label with expressions 34 map scale accuracy 184­185 page setup 185 report properties 147­148 zoom-layering 29 Setup Scalebar dialog 182 Show MapInfo Professional Tools command 15 Software components 4­5 documentation 5 Source, definition 198 Special notes 6 SQL Server authentication 8 SQL, definition 198 Standard geographies, definition 198 Starting TargetPro 8­11 Styles label lines 35 label text 35 labels 50 Summary, user guide 6 Symbol Object, definition 198

using only geographies selected on map 15 Thematic Shading, definition 199 Thematic Variable, definition 199 Theme legend 180 legend, definition 199 Theme Properties Button 26 True Median variable, creating 105 Types of reports 137

U

Units, map 41, 46, 48 Upgrading, custom reports 157­158 User guide summary 6 User Name 8

V

Value Of operator 104 Variables creating 103­106 Expression 103­104 Geography Based Constant 105­106 Geography Based Parent 106 Radius Based 105 True Median 105 Vintage, definition 200

W

Welcome dialog 9 Window Browser 52 definition 200 map 16 Windows authentication 8 Wizards DTS Import/Export 69­71 Find a Point 42­45 Working with geographies 37­62 with the Profile Manager 126 Workspace arrangement 11 definition 200 Workspace Manager command 14

T

TAB file, definition 199 Table, definition 199 Target Groups displaying statistics 132­133 managing 128­133 TargetPro, menu 13­15 Template Editor command 66 Text Cursor, definition 199 Text Style dialog 35 Thematic Layer, definition 199 Thematic Map button 13 creating 29­33 definition 199 preferences 15, 31­33 using a map layer in current view 14 using all geographies in project 15

Z

Zoom a map 22 area 22 buttons 22 layering 29 layering, examples 28 limit with map scale 184­185 Zoom In button 12 Zoom Out button 12

TargetPro 4.7 © 2005 MapInfo Corporation. All rights reserved.

216

TargetProUS47_UG.pdf

Information

TargetProUS47_UG.book

224 pages

Find more like this

Report File (DMCA)

Our content is added by our users. We aim to remove reported files within 1 working day. Please use this link to notify us:

Report this file as copyright or inappropriate

526698


You might also be interested in

BETA
TargetProUS47_UG.book
451.MIProfessionalBro.3.29.QXD